JP7369413B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that can execute a display performance using a display device when a game ball enters a winning opening (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Such gaming machines can perform display effects using character images, symbols, and the like.

JP2016-29956A

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of technology for increasing the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the interest of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later to aid understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of pending icons and decorative patterns,
Either the first display or the second display can be displayed in each display area in which each hold icon is displayed,
In the display area where the first display is displayed, the hold icon can be displayed on a first image having a specific shape ,
In the display area where the second display is displayed, a second image that is different from the decorative pattern, has the same shape as the first image, and has a different display content from the first image is displayed. image will be displayed and the hold icon will no longer be visible.
While the special figure is changing, the pending icon is not pre-read and rendered in each of the plurality of display areas where the first display is displayed while the second image is not displayed on the display means. After being displayed in a normal manner, the display of one of the plurality of display areas is switched from the first display to the second display, the second image is displayed, and the pending image is displayed. a first effect in which the icon becomes invisible and the first display continues to be displayed in another display area of the plurality of display areas;
After the first effect, the display of the display area that has been switched to the second display is switched from the second display to the first display, and the display of the second image disappears, and the display of the second image disappears. A gaming machine capable of performing the following: a second effect in which a pending icon is displayed again in a special manner in which the pending icon is pre-read and effected.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is an enlarged view of display devices. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining various types of random numbers used in gaming machines. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining determination tables T1 to T4. It is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type determination table T5. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in a non-time saving state. It is an explanatory diagram of fluctuation pattern judgment table T6 in a time saving state. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is an explanatory diagram of the big prize opening pattern determination table T8. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of starting port sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 prior judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 prior judgment processing. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of jackpot determination processing. It is a 1st flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of special symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state reset processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of V opening/closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of pending ball number processing. 3 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a preliminary determination information storage area. It is an explanatory diagram of a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of a fluctuating production start process. It is an explanatory diagram of a basic performance pattern determination table T52. It is an explanatory diagram of a chance up performance pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of processing during a fluctuation performance. It is a flowchart of display control processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation|movement of a movable accessory. It is a diagram for explaining button image action effect A. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining button image action effect B; It is a diagram for explaining button image action effect C. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining operation section enlarged display performance A; FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining operation section enlarged display performance B; It is a figure for explaining operation part partial enlargement display performance C. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an operation unit image protrusion movement effect A; FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining operation unit image protrusion movement effect B; FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an operation unit image protrusion movement effect C; FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an operation unit image protrusion movement effect D; FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an operation unit image protrusion display effect A; FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an operation unit image protrusion display effect B; FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an operation unit image protrusion display effect C; It is a figure for explaining pending icon/operation part image movement effect A. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a hold icon/operation unit image movement effect B; It is a diagram for explaining a hold icon/operation unit image movement effect C. It is a diagram for explaining a hold icon/operation unit image movement effect D. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a hold icon/operation unit image superimposition effect A; FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a hold icon/operation unit image superimposition effect B; FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a hold icon/operation unit image superimposition effect C; It is a diagram for explaining pending icon non-display effect A. It is a diagram for explaining pending icon non-display effect B. It is a figure for explaining pending icon non-display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining operation count effect A. It is a diagram for explaining operation count effect B (success). It is a diagram for explaining operation count effect B (failure). It is a diagram for explaining timer image movement effect A. It is a diagram for explaining timer image movement effect B. It is a diagram for explaining timer image movement effect C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a timer image tilt display effect A. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining timer image tilt display effect B; It is a diagram for explaining a timer image tilt display effect C. It is a diagram for explaining timer button effect A. It is a diagram for explaining timer button effect B. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a timer pseudo-continuous effect A. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining timer pseudo-continuation effect B; It is a figure for explaining pending change effect A. It is a diagram for explaining pending change performance B. It is a figure for explaining pending change effect C. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a display effect of the number of acquired pitches. It is a diagram for explaining payout display effect A. It is a diagram for explaining payout display performance B. It is a figure for explaining prize image/character image superimposition effect A. It is a figure for explaining prize image/character image superimposition effect B. It is a diagram for explaining winning image/character image superimposition effect C. It is a diagram for explaining meter effect A within a button image. It is a diagram for explaining meter effect B within a button image. It is a figure for explaining display effect A in a button image. It is a figure for explaining display effect B in a button image. It is a diagram for explaining multiple variation effects A. It is a diagram for explaining multiple variation effect B. It is a diagram for explaining multiple variation effect C. It is a diagram for explaining operation charge performance A (success). It is a diagram for explaining operation charge performance A (failure). It is a diagram for explaining operation charge performance B. It is a diagram for explaining pseudo-continuous point effect A. It is a diagram for explaining pseudo-continuous point effect B. It is a diagram for explaining timer freeze effect A. It is a diagram for explaining timer freeze effect B. It is a diagram for explaining timer freeze effect C. It is a diagram for explaining chance up meter performance A. It is a diagram for explaining chance up meter effect B. It is a diagram for explaining chance up meter effect C. It is a diagram for explaining a hold timer effect A. It is a diagram for explaining a hold timer performance B. It is a diagram for explaining a hold timer effect C. It is a diagram for explaining timer ball acquisition effect A. It is a figure for explaining timer ball acquisition effect B. It is a diagram for explaining timer ball acquisition effect C.

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained so as to correspond to the left-right direction as seen from the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires game balls based on a player's firing operation, and when a game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to a front frame (front frame part) 53, an outer frame (base frame part) that forms the outer shell of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. We are prepared. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and an excess ball tray (lower tray). ) 62, a performance button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a frame movable body 600. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the gaming area 3 of the gaming board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, and causes the game ball to be launched at a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotation angle. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61. The performance button 63 is an operation unit disposed near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player during a performance performed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation part imitating the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation section provided at the upper end of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the sword handle, and is operated (pressed) by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. Ru. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward, and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs a light emitting effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform sound production during games and the like. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53. The frame movable body 600 is configured to be movable from a stored state in which it is stored inside the front frame 53 to an exposed state in which it projects above the front frame 53.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center decoration 10, a fixed winning device (belly button) 19, and a normal variable winning device (electronic chew) 22. , gate (through chucker) 28, first big winning device (first attacker) 31, second big winning device (second attacker) 36, normal winning opening 27, out opening 16, and display devices. It is equipped with 40.

The game area 3 is an area where game balls shot by operating the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided protrudingly. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by operating the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and emits light from the back side of the game area 3.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the gaming area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a performance pattern display area in which performance patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a pending image display area in which pending images 9A and 9B are displayed. area, and a pending digested image display area in which the pending digested image 9C is displayed. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending, and are also referred to as pending icons or first pending icons. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also referred to as the pending icon or the second pending icon. The first hold icon and the second hold icon are collectively referred to as simply hold icons.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas: "left", "middle", and "right". A left presentation pattern (left decorative pattern) 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium performance pattern (medium decorative pattern) 8C is displayed in the medium pattern display area. A right effect pattern (right decorative pattern) 8R is displayed in the right pattern display area. The performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, by a combination of effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

For example, in the case of winning a jackpot, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed as a zero number such as "777". If it is a miss, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed with a miss, such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result not only on the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b but also on the image display device 7. Note that the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, the manner in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner may be a manner in which they are scrolled in the vertical direction, or may be in any other manner. The combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the performance of displaying the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will also be referred to as "performance symbol variation performance", "decorative pattern variation performance", or simply "variation performance". It should be noted that the variation performance of this decorative pattern is counted as one variation performance (one cycle of variation performance) during the period from when the special symbol starts changing until it stops (also referred to as a special symbol variation period). Therefore, even if there is a case where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts changing until it stops, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variable effect of the decorative pattern.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a, in addition to the performance symbol variation performance, a jackpot performance that is performed in parallel with a jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc. In the performance symbol variation performance, performance images such as background images and character images may also be displayed in addition to the performance symbols. In addition to the production pattern, the image display device 7 also includes an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can indicate that the special pattern is changing or indicate the lottery result of the special pattern. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that the identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays reserved images 9A according to the number of stored first special figures reserved, which will be described later, and a reserved image 9B that displays reserved images 9B according to the number of stored second special figures reserved, which will be described later. and a second hold display area. By displaying the holding images 9A and 9B, the stored number of first special figure holdings displayed on the first special figure holding display 43a, which will be described later, and the number of second special figure holdings displayed on the second special figure holding display 43b are determined. The number of memories can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays the pending digest image 9C. The pending digesting image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the pending digesting image 9C, the first special symbol pending or the second special symbol pending It is possible to clearly display to the player that the special drawing reservation has been completed ("extinction of special drawing reservation" to be described later).

The center decoration body 10 is located near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. A movable plate body 15 (also referred to as a movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is attached to the center decoration body 10. A stage part 11 is formed at the lower part of the center decoration body 10. The stage part 11 has a shape that can guide a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage part 11 to a first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decorative body 10. The warp section 12 includes an inlet section through which game balls flow in and an outlet section through which game balls flow out, and causes the game balls that flowed in through the inlet section to flow out to the stage section 11 through the exit section.

The fixed winning device (belly button) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3, and is located at a first starting hole (first starting winning hole, first ball entering hole) where the ease of entering the game ball always remains unchanged. (fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity for a first special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity for obtaining a jackpot random number and the like and determining a jackpot.

The normal variable prize winning device (electronic chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting hole 20 in the gaming area 3, and includes a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entering hole, variable starting hole) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 is an opportunity for a second special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in an open state. The electric chew 22 only needs to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible for the ball to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big prize winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow a game ball to pass through. Passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to release the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for obtaining a normal symbol random number (a winning random number) and determining a winning number.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and this acquired random number is used as a predetermined random number. It is a process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot by comparing it with the value corresponding to the "jackpot". The lottery result of this "jackpot" is not immediately notified to the player, but the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a first special symbol display 41a or a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is made. When the time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game is performed in which performance symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variably displayed special symbols, and the jackpot lottery result is more effectively notified to the player by this symbol matching game.

In addition, "normal symbol lottery" means that when a game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining a normal symbol is obtained, and this obtained random number is compared with a predetermined value corresponding to a "win". It is a process of determining whether or not it is a hit by doing so. Regarding the lottery result of this normal symbol, the lottery result is not announced immediately after the game ball passes through the gate 28, but the normal symbol is displayed fluctuating on the regular symbol display 42, which will be described later, and a predetermined fluctuation is performed. When the time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed (lit or extinguished) and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged at the upper right of the first starting opening 20 in the gaming area 3, and is connected to the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , a V region 39, a non-V region 70, and a V opening/closing member 71. The first big prize opening 30 includes an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that allows or inhibits reception of game balls through a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first big prize opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first big prize opening 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The first big prize winning device 31 includes a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , a first big prize opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas through which the game ball that has passed through the first grand prize opening 30 can pass inside the first grand prize winning device 31. . The first big winning hole sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the winning of a game ball into the first big winning hole 30. The V area sensor 39a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the first big prize opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to move the game ball. It is in the first state (rotating state) in which it distributes to the V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in the second state (stopping state) in which it is located at the origin and distributes game balls to the non-V area 70. . In addition, the V opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, but may have the function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big prize opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, for example, It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V area 39 in a retracted state (first state), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V area 70 in the advancing state. (Second state). In addition, in the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 is an opportunity for transition to a high probability state, which will be described later. In other words, the V area 39 serves as a variable probability operation opening. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 does not serve as a variable probability operation opening. The first big winning device 31 of this embodiment further includes a first big winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big winning device 31. The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big prize winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged at the upper right of the first big winning hole 30 in the gaming area 3, and the second big winning hole (second special winning hole) 35 It is equipped with The second big prize opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or allows reception of game balls by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second big prize opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second big prize opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state.

The normal winning opening 27 is provided at the bottom of the gaming area 3. Note that the number of normal winning holes 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges game balls that have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 3. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the display devices 40 will be described later.

The gaming area 3 includes a left gaming area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right gaming area 3B on the right side. A hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called "left-handed hitting." On the other hand, a hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called "right-handed hitting." In the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning in the first starting opening 20 by playing left-handed. On the other hand, it is configured so that by hitting right, you can aim to pass through the gate 28 and win a prize in the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display 43b. , and a general figure reservation display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The first special symbol reservation display 43a displays the number of stored operation reservations (first special symbol reservation) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reservation display 43b displays the number of stored operation reservations (second special symbol reservation) of the second special symbol display 41b. The normal symbol reservation display 44 displays the number of stored operation reservations (common symbol reservations) of the ordinary symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the second starting port 21. Below, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as a "special symbol." Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as the "special symbol display 41." In addition, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b are also collectively referred to as the "special figure holding display 43."

The special symbol display device 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (fluctuating display) and then stops displaying the special symbol (identification information). , jackpot lottery) results. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (stop symbol, special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) with a predetermined jackpot stopping pattern, the first jackpot 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot that was won). Alternatively, a special game (jackpot game) in which the second big prize opening 35 is opened is played. In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 and second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you can select one or two from the left as "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). , 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display jackpot symbols. If it is a loss, a losing symbol such as "●●●●●●●○" with only the rightmost LED lit is displayed. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) for a predetermined variable time. For example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted up display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all the LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the values (numerical information) of various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers obtained for that winning are , is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is in the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special drawing holding, and if it is winning in the second starting opening 21, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5). , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as a second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit in this embodiment is for both the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are 4 pieces. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when variable display of special symbols based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Extinguishing the special symbol reservation" refers to determining the jackpot random number etc. corresponding to the special symbol reservation and executing a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during execution of a medium or special game, the right to draw a jackpot for that prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number of prizes. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. The first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b each include, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure reservation display 43 displays the number of special symbols reserved by lighting up LEDs corresponding to the number of special symbols reserved.

The variable display of the normal symbols is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbols variably (variably displaying) and then stop displaying them. The normal pattern that is stopped and displayed (the normal pattern that is stopped and the normal pattern that is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one normal pattern that is selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stopping pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (normal pattern with a predetermined stopping pattern, that is, a normal winning pattern), an auxiliary game that opens the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. will be held. Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit, such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: off), is displayed. If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol such as "●○" with only the right LED lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off as a normal losing symbol may be adopted. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. As for the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be lit alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted up display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all the LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (winning random number) acquired for the passage is stored as a normal symbol in the normal symbol retention storage area 86 (FIG. 5). Once it is memorized. There is an upper limit to the number of general figure reservations that can be stored in the ordinary figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The general symbol reservation stored in the ordinary symbol reservation storage area 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary symbol reservation becomes possible. The extinguishing of a normal symbol reservation means to determine the normal symbol random number (winning random number) corresponding to the ordinary symbol reservation, and to execute a variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of normal symbols based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passing of the game ball, in other words, when the variable display of the normal symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed, winnings may be won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right to draw a normal symbol lottery for the passing of the symbols, up to a predetermined number. The number of general drawings on hold is displayed on the general drawing holding display 44. The general figure reservation display 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of ordinary figures held by lighting up the LEDs for the number of ordinary figures held.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and an audio control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls gaming profits such as jackpot lottery and game state transition, and constitutes a main control section. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effects to be executed as the game progresses, and together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the audio control board 106, constitutes a sub-control unit. Note that the sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs a signal to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first starting port sensor 20a, the second starting port sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning port sensor 30a, the second big winning port sensor 35a, and the V area. The sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal winning opening sensor 27a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chew solenoid 24, the first big winning hole solenoid 33, the second big winning hole solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The first starting port sensor 20a is provided inside the first starting port 20, and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first big winning hole sensor 30a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30, and detects a game ball that has won in the first big winning hole 30. The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35, and detects the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35. The V area sensor 39a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first big prize opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first big prize opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning hole sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the normal winning hole 27. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31.

Display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol pending display 43a, a second special symbol pending display 43b, and a normal symbol pending. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for monitoring payout. A prize ball payout device 120, a rental ball payout device 130, and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and a shooting device 112 is connected via a shooting control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball rental motor 131 of the rental ball payout device 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out rental balls. The paid-out rental balls are detected by the rental ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the firing device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114, and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

A sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a communication direction regulating means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The production control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the production of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub-ROM that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. It includes a CPU 92. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the production control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 , and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub-control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to programs for display control, the ROM 103 stores still image data and video data displayed on the image display device 7, including characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. image data such as background images, etc.) are stored. RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. CPU 102 executes a program stored in ROM 103. The production control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. etc. is output. Acoustic data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. Note that the voice control board 106 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, and may store acoustic data in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, and the panel movable body 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and controls these. The production control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, light emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and creates a light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The production control microcomputer 91 operates the board movable body 15 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The plate movable body 15 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decoration body 10. The production control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the board movable body 15, and controls the operation of the board movable body 15 according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to control the lighting of the lamp and control the operation of the movable panel 15 based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

A performance button detection switch 63a and a frame movable body 600 are connected to the relay board 108. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the frame movable body 600 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The frame movable body 600 is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the upper part of the front frame 53 (FIG. 1). The performance control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of the frame movable body 600, and controls the operation of the frame movable body 600 according to the operation pattern data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the relay board 108 includes a select button detection switch that detects when the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is pressed, a touch sensor that is provided on the front frame 53, and outputs a detection signal when a human body comes into contact with it. May be connected.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a fluctuation pattern. A determination table T6, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, a big prize opening pattern determination table T8, and a V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) that the game control microcomputer 81 executes. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure reservation storage area 85, and a general figure reservation memory. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main processing (described later), and includes advance determination commands, pending pitch count commands, A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the status of the gaming machine and the gaming status are set in the main control main processing (described later), and include a jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, first winning flag, second winning flag, The V flag, variable probability flag, time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in main control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a round counter, a probability variable counter, a time saving counter, and the like. The special operation status setting area 84d is an area where a status in special operation processing, which will be described later, is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which a first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which a second special figure reservation is stored. The first special figure reservation storage area 85a stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storage. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b has a first memory area for storing random value groups (reservation information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal symbol reservation storage area 86 stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as normal symbol random numbers (hit random numbers) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth symbols of the ordinary symbol reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for. In addition to the above-mentioned areas, the main RAM 84 includes a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and a drive buffer in which drive data for driving the board movable body 15 and frame movable body 600 is set. A data buffer etc. are provided.

The sub ROM93 (FIG. 6(A)) stores a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T51, a basic performance pattern determination table T52, a chance-up performance pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. . These decision tables are referred to by the production control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) that the production control microcomputer 91 executes. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6(B)) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a preliminary determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in sub-control main processing (described later), including advance judgment commands, pending pitch count commands, fluctuation start commands, and fluctuation commands. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passing command, a customer waiting command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area where commands output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub-control main processing (described later). This is an output buffer) in which a variable performance start command, a variable before end command, a variable performance end command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, an ending performance start command, etc. are set. The preliminary determination information storage area 94c stores preliminary determination information in sub-control main processing (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which counters used in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a first special symbol reservation performance counter, a second special symbol reservation performance counter, and a regular symbol reservation performance counter. , a variable performance counter, a time saving performance counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7(A) shows the random number obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 7(B) shows the random number obtained by the performance control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "jackpot random number," a "jackpot type random number," a "reach random number," a "fluctuation pattern random number," and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at timings described later. It is configured as follows. The “jackpot random number” is a random number used for lottery to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “jackpot type random number” is a random number used for lottery of the winning jackpot type (jackpot type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. "Reach Random Number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the performance symbol variation performance that indicates the result when the jackpot judgment is a loss, and has a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one fluctuating performance symbol remaining among multiple performance symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the fluctuating performance symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a state in which a combination of performance symbols indicates a jackpot (for example, a state of "7↓7"). Note that the performance symbols that are displayed in a stopped state in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if they are shaking within the display screen 7a. The "variation pattern random number" is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "normal symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chew 22. Normal symbol random numbers take values in the range from 0 to 255. The “jackpot random number,” “jackpot type random number,” “reach random number,” and “variation pattern random number” are acquired based on the ball entering the starting hole (first starting hole 20 or second starting hole 21). The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a. It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The “normal symbol random number (winning random number)” is obtained based on passing through the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the ordinary symbol retention storage area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "pre-read performance random number" and a "chance up random number" at timings to be described later. The "pre-read effect random number" is a random number used to determine the pre-read effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance up performance during the fluctuating performance, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "pre-read effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a preliminary determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The obtained random number group is stored in the sub-RAM 94. The "chance up random number" is acquired based on a fluctuation start command being output from the main control unit to the sub control unit. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8(A) shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8(B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8(C) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4.

In the jackpot determination table T1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the obtained jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) corresponds to a "jackpot" or a "loss" in the main control main processing (described later). This table is referred to for determination. In FIG. 8(A), in the "normal probability state", if the jackpot random number value is "0 to 164", it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random number value is "a number other than 0 to 164 (165 to 65,535 )”, it is shown that it is determined to be a “lose”. In addition, in the "high probability state", if the jackpot random number is "0 to 649", it will be determined as a "jackpot", and if the jackpot random number is "a number other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)", it will be judged as a "jackpot". It is shown that this is determined to be a "loss". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

The reach determination table T2 indicates whether the reach random value (one of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to "reach exists" or "reach does not exist". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the In FIG. 8(B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127), it is determined that there is no reach. In addition, in the "time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is determined that there is a reach. It is shown that it is determined that there is no reach. The contents of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, it is harder to reach in the event of a loss in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because in the time-saving state, more no-reach losses with short fluctuation times are selected, thereby speeding up the processing speed of special symbol reservations.

The normal symbol winning determination table T3 indicates whether the normal symbol random number value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to a "win" or a "loss". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the In FIG. 8(C), in the "non-time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 2", it is determined to be a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 2 (3 255)", it is determined that the result is a "loss". In addition, in the "time saving state", if the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254", it will be determined as a "win", and if the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)", it will be determined as a "win". , it is shown that it is determined to be a "lose".

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine how many seconds the normal symbol fluctuation time is according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table that is referenced to do this. In FIG. 8(D), when in the "non-time saving state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and when in the "time saving state", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second". It has been shown that

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 is composed of "jackpot type" and "special symbol This is a table that is referenced to determine the type. In FIG. 9, when winning in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), if the jackpot type random number is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16 RV passing planned jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 3". When the jackpot type random number is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" and the special pattern stopping symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 4". When the jackpot type random number is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" and the special pattern stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 5". On the other hand, if you win in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), regardless of the random number of the jackpot type (any number from 0 to 127), the jackpot type will be determined as "16 RV passing planned jackpot", It is shown that the stop symbol of special figure 2 (special figure stop symbol) is determined to be "jackpot symbol 1". In addition, by referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special pattern stop pattern data" corresponding to the special pattern stop pattern, the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED)" of the special game can be determined. "command" can also be specified. Regarding the specific contents of "16RV passing planned jackpot", "16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot", "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot", and "16R (actually 13R) V not planning jackpot" This will be explained later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127). . In FIG. 10, for example, a player enters the first starting slot 20 in a non-time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines that he has lost, the reach determination table T2 determines that he has a reach, and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~2'', and when the fluctuation pattern random number value is between "0 and 60", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P7". In FIG. 11, for example, a prize is won in the second starting port 21 in the time saving state, it is determined as a "jackpot" in the jackpot determination table T1, it is determined as a "jackpot due to pass through 16 RV" in the jackpot type determination table T5, and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "0 to 10", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when reaching a reach, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect where the fluctuation time after reach is longer than normal reach. Here, three types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3) with different variation times are set. The length of the fluctuation time is SP3>SP2>SP1. SP1-3 are progressively executed after normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP3 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-association.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the gaming state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11" in the "non-time saving state", and the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 12" in the "time saving state". It has been shown that FIG. 12(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 11 and the open pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once for an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, each opening time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) is 1.0 seconds. However, the opening of this electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular winning number, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening pattern determination table T8. The big winning hole opening pattern determination table T8 is based on the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole according to the special pattern stop symbol data (FIG. 9), in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs main control main processing (described later). This table is referred to in order to determine 35 open patterns. In FIG. 13(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is "opening pattern 21". ”, when the special pattern stop symbol data is “14H” or “15H”, the opening pattern is determined to be “open pattern 22”, and when the special pattern stop symbol data is “13H”, the opening pattern is “open pattern 22” Pattern 23" is determined. FIG. 13(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 21, the open pattern 22, and the open pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, in the 1st to 13th and 15th R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening), and in the 14th and 16th R, the opening is performed once, The second big prize opening 35 is opened for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, in the 1st to 13th R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened (long opening) for 1 time and 29.5 seconds, and in the 14th and 16th R, the opening is 1 time and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. Open the second grand prize opening 35 for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th R, open the first grand prize opening 30 once for the number of openings and for an opening time of 0.1 seconds (short opening). . In the opening pattern 23, in the 1st to 13th and 15th R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened (long opening) for 1 opening time and 29.5 seconds, and in the 14th R, the opening number is 1 time and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. Open the second grand prize opening 35 for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and in the 16th R, open the second grand prize opening 35 once for the number of openings and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). . However, the first grand prize opening 30 and the second grand prize opening 35 will be opened even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular number of prizes, maximum 9). Closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 according to the special pattern stop symbol data (FIG. 9) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table being referenced. In FIG. 14(A), when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", or "21H", the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined to be "open pattern 31", and the special figure stop symbol When the data is "13H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 32", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 33", and the special figure stopping symbol data is determined to be "opening pattern 33". It is shown that when "15H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 34". FIG. 14(B) shows the contents of the open pattern 31, the open pattern 32, the open pattern 33, and the open pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. At the 10th and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. At the 8th and 10th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, in the 2nd and 6th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds, and the second prize is won. When this happens, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R, when the first prize is won in the first big prize opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened short for an opening time of 0.1 seconds. .

4. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "jackpots" and "losses" as a result of jackpot drawings (special symbol drawings). In the case of a "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When you win a jackpot, the jackpot game opens the jackpot (first jackpot 30 and second jackpot 35) in an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed (jackpot type). ” is executed. A jackpot game is an example of a special game. A jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open games), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, the types of jackpots are roughly divided into two types: "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V-not-passing planned jackpot." "V passing planned jackpot" operates the opening/closing member 32, opening/closing member 37, and V opening/closing member 71 in an opening pattern that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39 (V passing scheduled opening pattern) during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. Here, the jackpot where the special symbol stop symbol data is 11H to 14H or 21H corresponds to the "V passing planned jackpot". The combinations of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 are (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33) ) or (open pattern 23: open pattern 32), the game ball can pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. "V non-passing expected jackpot" is an opening pattern (opening pattern not expected to pass through V) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V area 39 during the jackpot game (opening pattern not expected to pass V), opening/closing member 32, opening/closing member 37, and V opening/closing member 71. It is a jackpot that activates the . Here, the jackpot with the special figure stop symbol data of 17H corresponds to the "V non-passing planned jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V area is 39 becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through. As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves as both the V passing scheduled opening pattern and the V non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The “V passing planned jackpot” includes “16RV passing planned jackpot”, “16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot”, and “16R (actually 15R) V passing planned jackpot”. The actual total number of rounds in the "16 RV expected jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second big prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

In the "16R (actually 13R) V jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 14R and Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the jackpot opening is extremely short, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

In the "16R (actually 15R) V-pass expected jackpot", the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. In other words, in 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R The second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 15R) jackpot expected to pass through V", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short and no prize balls are expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 15R) V passing expected jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and passage to the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is easily possible.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" of the open pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning hole 30 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and in 14R and Even in 16R, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: Opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (actually 13R) V-non-passing planned jackpot", the opening time of the jackpot is extremely short from 14R to 16R, making it a round in which no prize ball is expected. In other words, the "16R (actually 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is actually a jackpot of 13R. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: Opening pattern 34), and the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30 is opened. It is almost impossible for game balls to pass through.

As is clear from the above explanation, the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass through V" and the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is scheduled to pass V" are the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 ( The opening patterns of the opening/closing member 32 and opening/closing member 37 are the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). In other words, in the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot not expected to pass through V", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, in the "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to pass through V", the game ball can easily pass through the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state). This makes it difficult for players to distinguish between "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is not expected to pass" and "16R (actually 13R) jackpot that is scheduled to pass V", and the gaming state after the jackpot is uncertain. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time-saving state (low-accuracy/high-base state) or the high-accuracy/time-saving state (high-accuracy/high-base state) will occur. That is, the gaming state after the "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is a high-accuracy time-saving state (high-accuracy high base state) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big prize opening 30. ) but with a high probability is a latent state (latent probability variable state).

In addition, as shown in Figure 9, the distribution ratio of jackpots in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 68/128 (approximately 53%) for jackpots scheduled to pass V and 60/128 (approximately 53%) for jackpots scheduled to pass V not. 128 (approximately 47%). On the other hand, all the jackpots won in the second special symbol (special symbol 2) lottery are V-passing scheduled jackpots. That is, if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on a prize entered into the second starting port 21 which becomes possible to enter by executing the electric support control described later, it will always be a V-passing planned jackpot. In this way, in the gaming machine 1, the jackpot lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 is more popular than the jackpot lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 21 (first special symbol lottery). The lottery (the lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous for the player.

5. Description of gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. The game control microcomputer 81 can perform "probability variation control" and "variation time shortening control" on the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 performs probability variation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "high probability state," and the state in which probability variation control is not performed is simply referred to as a "normal probability state." (non-high probability state, low probability state). The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be a jackpot is greater in a high probability state than in a normal probability state, as probability fluctuation control for special symbols. A high probability state is achieved by making a jackpot determination. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of hitting the jackpot than the normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control on the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, compared to the case where the probability variation control is not executed, The probability that the display result (stopping symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol will be a jackpot symbol is increased.

In addition, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 to shorten the fluctuation time is referred to as a "time-saving state", and the state in which the fluctuation time is not controlled to shorten is simply referred to as a "non-time-saving state". That's what it means. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variable display to the time of derivation and display of the display result) is shorter than in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 executes a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often in a time-saving state than in a non-time-saving state. Determine the variation pattern used. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variable time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, compared to the case where the variable time reduction control is not executed, the variation of the special symbol A short variation time is more likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings in the starting opening (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) are more likely to occur. This allows players to aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 81 may perform probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time reduction control simultaneously, or only one of them, for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbols in the time-saving state, but does not perform them in the non-time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 performs normal symbol probability fluctuation control by creating a normal symbol hit determination table T3 (where the number of normal symbol random numbers (random winning numbers) that are determined to be hits is greater in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. Hit determination (normal symbol determination) is performed using FIG. 8(C)). Therefore, in the time saving state, the winning probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability variation control on the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, compared to the case where the probability variation control is not executed, the normal symbol display 42 The probability that the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol (stopped symbol) becomes a winning symbol is increased. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but it is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control on the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is greater than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes control to increase the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, and control for extending the opening time and increasing number of openings for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball enters the second starting port 21 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, a state where these controls are being executed is called a "high base state", and a state where these controls are not being executed is called a "low base state". In a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports winning to the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not need to execute all of the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the control for increasing the number of openings for the electric chew 22. It is only necessary that by executing one or more controls, the electric chew 22 can be opened more easily than when the controls are not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being associated with the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after a jackpot game due to winning the V passing scheduled jackpot is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the player passes to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. . This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high-accuracy, high-base state" or a "high-accuracy, time-saving state." The high probability/high base state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (in this case, 160 times) or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after a jackpot game due to winning a jackpot scheduled to not pass V will be a normal probability state (non-high probability (that is, a state of low probability), a short-time state, and a high-base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability high base state" and "low probability time saving state." The low probability/high base state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. When playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low-probability, low-base state is sometimes referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low-probability non-time-saving state (also simply referred to as a non-time-saving state)." Further, the state in which a special game (big hit game) is being executed will be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Furthermore, a state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state is referred to as a "specific gaming state."

In a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, the game can be progressed more advantageously if the game ball enters the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. Due to the electric support control, the electric chew 22 is opened more easily than in the low base state, and it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 21 than to win a prize in the first starting port 20. be. Therefore, in the high base state, the game ball is hit to the right in order to enter the second starting port 21 while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is the trigger for the normal symbol lottery. This allows you to get more starting prizes (winning into the starting hole) than if you hit left-handed. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, even during the jackpot game, the game is played with the right hand. On the other hand, in the low base state, the game can proceed more advantageously if the game ball enters the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the ball to the left. Since the electric support control is not executed, the electric chew 22 is more difficult to open than in the high base state, and it is easier to win a prize in the first starting port 20 than to win a prize in the second starting port 21. This is because For this reason, in the low base state, the game ball is hit to the left in order to cause the game ball to enter the first starting port 20. This allows you to win more starting prizes than if you hit right-handed.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be explained based on FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the validity determining means (FIG. 23) and the preliminary determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. In the main control main processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). Initial settings include, for example, setting the main CPU 82 and resetting various flags, statuses, counters, and the like. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial settings are executed only once after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interrupt processing (step S002), and performs normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values (jackpot random number, jackpot type random number, reach random number, fluctuation pattern random number) shown in FIG. , normal symbol random number value) is updated by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows an interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, main side timer interrupt processing (step S005) can be executed. The main side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined period (for example, a 4 msec period). That is, the main side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, every 4 msec). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing ends and until the next main side timer interrupt processing starts, the updating processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating processing is repeatedly executed. . Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main side timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. In other words, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and other periods (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing until the start of the next main side timer interrupt processing). It is carried out both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data to the main RAM 84 for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning opening. Set in buffer. The various sensors are, for example, the first starting hole sensor 20a, the second starting hole sensor 21a, the first big winning hole sensor 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, and the normal winning hole sensor 27a (FIG. 3).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs starting opening sensor detection processing (step S103), normal operation processing (step S104), special operation processing (step S105), V area sensor detection processing (step S106), and hold ball detection processing. The numerical processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After processing the number of reserved balls, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S109). In other processes, for example, the second special figure holding display 43b is controlled to display the number based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 2, which will be described later, and the first special figure is displayed based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 1. The hold display 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If no game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S202). The number of normal symbols reserved is the number of normal symbols reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of regular symbols reserved. If the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbols reserved balls (step S203), a normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 obtains the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: value of label -TRND-H), and stores the obtained random value in the first to Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in a storage area corresponding to the current number of normal symbols reserved balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 21 or not. This determination is made depending on whether or not a game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a. If no game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved special drawings 2 balls is "4 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special symbols 2 reserved balls is the number of reserved 2nd special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved 2nd special symbols. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Figure 7: Label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Figure 7: Value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 7: Label-TRND-AS value), -TRND-RC value) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label -TRND-T1). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the second special figure holding storage area 85b for special figure 2 advance determination processing (FIG. 18), which will be described later. to be memorized (retained). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). Details of the special figure 2 advance determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or not. This determination is made depending on whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor 20a. If no game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "4 (upper limit)" ( Step S211). The number of reserved special symbols 1 is the number of reserved first special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved first special symbols. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is ended. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, similarly to the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are obtained. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for special figure 1 advance determination processing (FIG. 19), which will be described later. to be memorized (retained). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). Details of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, no preliminary determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary jackpot judgment with reference to the high probability state table of the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value that is temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer through special drawing 2 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: Step S208). do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reference jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) and the jackpot random number value to pre-determine whether or not it is a jackpot. Here, since it is a high probability state (the probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the high probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") out of the jackpot judgment table T1. Refer to this to determine in advance whether or not it is a jackpot. That is, when the jackpot random number value is between "0" and "649", it is determined in advance that it is a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is a "loss". In addition, in this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, a preliminary determination different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. A preliminary determination may be made using the jackpot determination table.

If the result of the preliminary jackpot determination is "lose" (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "jackpot" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type preliminary determination (step S305). In the jackpot type preliminary determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first uses the jackpot type random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, even if the jackpot type random number is any one of "0" to "127", it is determined in advance that it is a "jackpot expected to pass through 16RV". In this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later; however, in other embodiments, a preliminary determination different from the jackpot type determination table T5 may be used. A preliminary determination may be made using a jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains a fluctuating pattern random number value as a judgment value temporarily stored in the preliminary judgment buffer by the special drawing 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), And obtain the reach random value. Next, since the time-saving state is here (the time-saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time-saving state, and determines the jackpot preliminary determination result in step S304. A fluctuation pattern is identified from the preliminary judgment result of reach/absence obtained from the reach random value and the fluctuation pattern random value. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of reserved pitches. Here, it is assumed that all variation patterns that may be selected depending on the difference in the number of reserved pitches are selected. For example, if a loss with a reach is determined in advance from the jackpot preliminary determination result and the preliminary determination result of the presence or absence of a reach, and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of pending balls is "1 to 2". ”, the variation pattern “P64” is selected, and the number of reserved pitches is “3 to 4”, the variation pattern “P68” is selected. Note that in this embodiment, preliminary determination is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later; however, as another embodiment, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 may be used. The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the above.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a preliminary determination command. The preliminary determination command includes a jackpot preliminary determination result (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type preliminary determination result), and a fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created advance determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special figure 1 advance judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (FIG. 17: Step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 advance determination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process is finished. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, no preliminary determination is performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary jackpot judgment by referring to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot judgment table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S401: NO). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value that is temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer through special drawing 1 related random number acquisition processing (FIG. 17: step S213). do. Next, since the normal probability state is here (the probability variable flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81 selects the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") out of the jackpot judgment table T1. ”) to determine whether or not it is a jackpot in advance. That is, when the jackpot random number value is between "0" and "164", it is determined in advance that it is a "jackpot", and when it is any other value, it is determined in advance that it is a "loss". Note that the preliminary jackpot determination may use a jackpot determination table for preliminary determination that is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special drawing 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), so the explanation will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process moves to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbols are changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. If the normal symbols are not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbols is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved pitches is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 with the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol being "0", in step S203 of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved balls of the regular symbol is "1". ”, and then, in this step S504, the reservation is extinguished and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol becomes “0” immediately. This also applies to the number of reserved balls in the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of pending special symbols becomes "1", and then in step S1404 and step S212 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), which will be described later. In S1410, the reservation is exhausted and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first inputs the normal symbol random number value ( Read out the winning random value). Then, it is determined whether or not it is a hit using the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether it is a time saving state or not), and the normal symbol winning determination table T3. For example, in a non-time saving state, if the normal symbol random value is between "0" and "2", it is determined to be a "win", and if the normal symbol random value is other than that, it is determined to be a "lose". (See FIG. 8(C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the gaming state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the gaming state determination result and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 to determine the normal symbol fluctuation. Select the variation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see Figure 8 (D)) . The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol variation pattern to start variable display of the normal symbols (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The normal symbol fluctuation time is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8(D)). If the variable time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the fluctuating display of the normal symbols continues. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variation display (step S509), and if the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505) is a "loss", (Step S510: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, in the case of "win" in the above hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew release pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the gaming state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and determines the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 using the gaming state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. Select. Here, in the non-time-saving state, "open pattern 11" is selected, and in the time-saving state, "open pattern 12" is selected. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation according to the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, if the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 6 pieces), or the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the time to close the electric chew 22 is reached. One of the things that has been achieved is that it has been fulfilled. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. If the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (occlusions) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and the main processing finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 31 and second grand prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into "1" of "special operation status", They are called "2", "3", and "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation processing, output of a fluctuation stop command etc. is executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of an opening command, etc. is executed at the time of a jackpot. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: Step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401). When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), in other words, the random value group acquired due to the winning in the second starting opening 21 is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the storage location of the reservation information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b from the current position to the side from which it is read. At the same time as shifting by one, the pending information stored in the farthest location from the read side in the second special figure pending storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, if pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared and the pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the pending information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. Through the above steps, the second special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. It is shifted to the held digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) are respectively on the left side. Shift by one (Figure 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, a variation display of the second special symbol is started, and a variation time timer is set. A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special figure 2 variation start command) set in the special figure 2 variation start process includes information regarding the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information regarding fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" ( Step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning in the first starting slot 20 is stored in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the fluctuation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a from the current position to the side where they are read out. At the same time, the reservation information stored in the farthest location from the read side in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). Through the above steps, the first special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It is shifted to the held digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, the reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) are respectively on the right side. Shift by one (Figure 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special symbol reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and a variation display of the first special symbol is started, and a variation time timer is set. A variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is set in the variation time timer. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special figure 1 variation start command) set in the special figure 1 variation start process includes information regarding the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process ( Information regarding the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information regarding fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by turning on/off a demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined standby time to elapse, and then sets a customer waiting standby command to display a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this process ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, the extinguishment of the second special figure reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol reservation is a jackpot that provides a greater profit for the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol reservation (V-passing expected jackpot) It has become easier to win.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). The jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). If the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), a jackpot determination is made with reference to the high probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first piece of the second reserved special figure) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reserved) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reference jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. Here, since it is a high probability state (probability change flag is ON), it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot based on the table for high probability state (jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") of the jackpot judgment table T1. judge.

In step S1501, if the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value using the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state is here (the probability variable flag is OFF), it is determined whether it is a jackpot based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") of the jackpot judgment table T1. Determine whether or not.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the type of jackpot (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process for special figure 2, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process for special figure 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and the process ends. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the jackpot determination result is "lose", special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , this process ends.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the gaming state is a time saving state (step S1600). A determination as to whether or not the time saving state is established is made based on whether the time saving flag is ON or not. If it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process moves to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602). If the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process moves to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is the special drawing 2 (step S1603). If the jackpot is special map 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type will definitely be a V-passing planned jackpot, so the process skips to step S1605. If the jackpot is special map 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot type is a V-passing planned jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. This is done based on the special figure stop symbol data.

If the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the table for jackpots scheduled to pass through V in a non-time-saving state among the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a fluctuating pattern random value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process for special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process for the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reserved) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V passing scheduled jackpot, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. ” to “P3” (in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is “P21” to “P23”) are referenced (addresses are set). From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as a fluctuation pattern for special drawing 1, and one of "P21" to "P23" for special drawing 2 is selected.

If the jackpot type is a V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Then, a variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, we will use the portions ("P4" to "P6") corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. ) is referred to. One of "P4" to "P6" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random values.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number is a reach established random number (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first piece of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure pending) of the first special figure pending storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random value to determine whether or not there is a reach. Here, since it is a non-time saving state, the reach is determined based on the table for the non-time saving state (the part where the reach judgment value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13") of the reach judgment table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random value is a reach establishment random value (step S1607: YES), that is, when there is a reach and there is a loss, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the non-time-saving state from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as a table for a loss with reach in a non-time-saving state, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. The "P14" part (in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is "P24" to "P31" part) is referred to. In the special figure 1, one of "P7" to "P14" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of "P24" to "P31" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 2. Since the selected variation pattern changes depending on the number of balls on hold, a shortening variation function works according to the number of balls on hold. In other words, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". More and more short fluctuation patterns are being selected. Thereby, when the number of reserved balls is large, it is possible to increase the speed at which special symbols are reserved.

If the reach random value is not a reach established random value (step S1607: NO), that is, if there is no reach and there is no reach, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the non-time-saving state from the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for no-reach loss (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time-saving state no reach loss, of the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state shown in FIG. The "P16" part (in the special figure 2, the variation pattern is "P32" to "P33" part) is referred to. In the special figure 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the variation pattern from the readout variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 2. Here, too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of balls on hold, so the shortening variation function works according to the number of balls on hold.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (FIG. 25: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing in steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing in steps S1603 to S1609 described above, except for the following points, so a description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processing in steps S1613 to S1619 and the processing in steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the part of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 that is referenced is different from. Specifically, in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time-saving state is referred to. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time-saving state shown in FIG. is referred to as "P41" to "P43", and in special drawing 2, the variation pattern is "P61" to "P63". From the read fluctuation pattern random number value, one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as a fluctuation pattern for special drawing 1, and one of "P61" to "P63" is selected for special drawing 2. For example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P44 ” to “P46”) are referenced. One of "P44" to "P46" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random values.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: Step S108). This starts the variable display of special symbols.

[Special symbol fluctuation processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 21: Step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The special symbol fluctuation time is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the stoppage of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of special symbols at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: Step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs game state management processing (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time saving times, and the details will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808) and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22), and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening pattern for the jackpot and the V opening/closing member according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the big winning hole opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the big winning hole from the special figure stop symbol data, and uses the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the big winning hole. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the determined opening pattern. . For example, when the special figure stop pattern data is "11H", "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot won, together with the opening patterns of the jackpot and the V opening/closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit release games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, the round counter is set to "16" (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The gaming state reset process is a process for resetting the probability change flag and the time saving flag (returning them to OFF), and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start a jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and the present process ends.

[Game state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 27: Step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability change flag is ON or not (step S2001). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of variations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "160" is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. As a result of decrementing the probability change counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2003). If the value of the probability change counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. If the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time saving counter counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, when transitioning to the time-saving state, the time-saving counter is set to "100" if it is in the low-accuracy/high-base state, and "160" is set to the time-saving counter if it is in the high-accuracy/high-base state. As a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" (step S2007). If the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information regarding the current gaming state just set (whether or not it is a variable probability state, a variable probability counter value, whether it is a time saving state or not, a time saving counter value, etc.).

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state reset process (FIG. 27: Step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the probability change flag is ON or not (step S2101). If the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In other words, during the execution of the jackpot game, the player is in a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. Since the gaming machine 1 is always in a low base state during a non-time saving state, it is in a low base state while a jackpot game is being executed.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: Step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "jackpot end flag" is a flag indicating that all openings of the jackpot devices (first jackpot device 31 and second jackpot device 36) based on the opening pattern have been completed in the jackpot game being executed. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process moves to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), a V opening/closing member operation process for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of this embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls enter the first big prize opening 30, and in the V opening/closing member operation process, it is operated according to the V opening/closing member opening pattern T9. When a game ball of a predetermined number wins, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period of time. Details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 and second big winning opening 35) is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process moves to step S2210.

If the grand prize opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is time (timing) to open the grand prize opening (step S2203). The time to open the big winning hole may be, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot has passed and it is time to start opening in the first round game, or when the big winning hole that was temporarily closed after opening is reopened. This includes the time when the interval time (closed time) has elapsed and it is time to start opening again. If it is not time to open the big prize opening (step S2203: NO), the process moves to step S2220.

If it is the time (timing) to open the big winning hole (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning hole opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning hole (the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) depending on the type of jackpot. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In addition, in this embodiment, the grand prize opening is not opened multiple times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the big winning opening is opened multiple times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the opening of the big winning opening during one round. It is also possible to determine whether it is the first opening or not, and to set the round designation command only if it is the first opening. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In step S2202 described above, if the grand prize opening is being opened (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the grand prize opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 9 per round), or the time has come to close the grand prize opening. (i.e., that a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since opening the big prize opening). Then, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big prize opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the big prize opening is closed. This is because, as described above, the time (interval time) for closing the big prize opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether a predetermined interval time has elapsed since closing the big prize opening. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0" or not. A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (step S2227), and a jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In this embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the "16R (actually 13R) V-passing planned jackpot" is "16R (actually 13R) V-not-passing planned jackpot". The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass into the V area 39 in "Jackpot". As a result, even if the game ball passes through the V area 39 with a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to pass through V", a "16R (actually 13R) jackpot expected to not pass through V" will occur to the player. ”, it can be recognized that no game ball has passed into the V area 39. In addition, the ending time when the game ball does not pass to the V area 39 in "16R (actually 13R) V passing expected jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the jackpot ending starts, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process ends.

In step S2200 described above, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. Thereafter, a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, is executed and the present process ends.

[V opening/closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: Step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that it is an open round when the round counter values are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5". If it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in this round.

If it is an opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first winning flag is ON or not (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first ball won in the first big winning hole 30 in the round. If the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process moves to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not a winning of the first ball has been detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first big prize opening 30 in this round, and there is no need to operate the V opening/closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-circuits the V opening/closing member 71 and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is performed when the first ball wins, regardless of whether it is "short opening" or "long opening". This is to allow the short circuit to be opened (in this case, for 0.1 seconds) at the same time. In addition, in the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is very short, so the first game ball that enters the first big prize opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 and is not played. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V effective period setting process, the V effective period during which the V opening/closing member 71 is open and several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is set as the V effective period during which the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening/closing member 71 (here, for 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and while the V opening/closing member 71 is open. And 1 second after closing is set as the V effective period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when a jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a (described later in the V area sensor detection processing (see Figure 33)). Further, "determining that the detection of a game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if a game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (ball brushing period) is because there is a physical distance between the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This takes into consideration the period until the game ball that enters the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed is detected by the V area sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when V passing (passing of a game ball to the V area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is turned ON when V passing is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is assumed that it will not be turned on. Note that when the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON, that is, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability state (see the gaming state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). This prevents the V flag from being turned on and set to a high probability state based on V passing due to fraudulent activity. After the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505) and moves to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the second ball has won in the first grand prize opening 30 when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. If the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process moves to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is a long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process moves to step S2540. On the other hand, if it is a long open (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process moves to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 long and performs a V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long when the second ball wins (in this case, a maximum of 31.5 seconds). ). In addition, since the maximum playing time for one round is 31.5 seconds (29.5 seconds maximum opening time of the grand prize opening + 2 seconds interval closing time), generally speaking, the second ball will win the prize. The time from the end of the round to the end of the round will be less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, so the long opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, in the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is relatively long. configured to pass. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening/closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period when the V opening/closing member 71 is closed at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524) and moves to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V opening/closing member 71 is open. If the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended (step S2550). As mentioned above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the round game has ended depending on whether a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after closing the big prize opening. Make a judgment.

If the round game has ended (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), and performs the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. Setting processing is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and after several seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period starts. Make the settings and finish this process.

If the round game has not ended (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). For example, in the case of a short-circuit opening, the condition for closing the V opening/closing member 71 may include that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after opening the V opening/closing member 71. If the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), V opening/closing member closing processing and V invalid period setting processing are performed (step S2552), and the present processing ends. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), this process ends with the V opening/closing member 71 in the open state and the V valid period continuing.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), it determines whether the round game has ended (step S2571). If the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), the process ends.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). If the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and the time saving counter is set to "100" (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a "non-high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a low probability high base). This low-probability-high base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times, or the player wins the next jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets the probability variation counter to "160" (step S2305), The V flag is turned OFF (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets the time saving counter to "160" (step S2308). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy, high-base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the variable display of the special symbol is performed 160 times, or the player wins the next jackpot.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information regarding the gaming state that has just been set.

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 16: Step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If no game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V is in the valid period (step S2602). The V effective period is a period set by the V effective period setting process (steps S2504, S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or closed during the second, fourth, sixth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds. be done. If it is not within the V validity period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is within the V validity period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets a V pass command (step S2604), and ends this process. .

[Held pitch count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the pending pitch count process (FIG. 16: Step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the number of reserved balls command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the number of reserved balls, and includes information regarding the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of regular symbol reserved balls. . After setting the number of reserved balls command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the production control microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94.

[Sub control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main processing, the production control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization processing (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, reset of various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the production control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4015), and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7(B) by adding one. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Furthermore, instead of adding up the random numbers one by one, two or more may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 allows an interrupt for the interrupt process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The production control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a process during variable performance (step S4305). The process during variable performance is a process for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variable performance to cause the display screen 7a to execute a specific display performance, and the details will be described later. After the process during the variable performance, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the production button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 sends various commands set in the production command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 by the received command analysis process to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute display effects according to the received commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes audio production to output audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received the various commands executes a lamp effect that controls the light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number updating processing.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a preliminary determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern in the case of executing the pre-reading effect. The details of the pre-read effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned prefetch effect determination process is skipped. The look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a jackpot, and is executed during the variable performance.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a command for the number of reserved balls has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the reservation display process, information is set in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 based on the information regarding the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls included in the number of reserved balls command. The values of the first special symbol reservation performance counter, the second special symbol reservation performance counter, and the regular symbol reservation performance counter are updated. Thereby, information on each number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 91 controls the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the hold pitch count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), a variable effect start process is performed (step S4460). "Variation performance start processing" is a process of selecting a fluctuation performance pattern (content) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. Details of the variable performance start process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variable effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), a variable effect end process is performed (step S4470). "Fluctuation performance end processing" is a process for stopping the fluctuation performance executed during special symbol fluctuation. In the fluctuating performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a counter etc. based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and also sets a fluctuating performance end command for ending the fluctuating performance. As a result, the decorative pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 or 2 which is changing is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. Note that if the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If it has been received (step S4475: YES), opening performance pattern determination processing is performed (step S4480). The "opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening performance pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (jackpot game). In the opening performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets in the sub-RAM 94 information regarding the special symbol stop pattern data that is included in the opening command and is set at the time of jackpot winning determination. Then, the opening performance start command for starting the selected opening performance is selected in the performance command set area of the sub-RAM 94 by selecting the performance pattern of the opening performance that has been set in advance in accordance with the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores the predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. The image data is read from the image display device 7 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, in step S4475, if the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it has been received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The "round performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening game performance pattern (content) to be executed during opening of the big prize opening or during an interval between openings in a special game (jackpot game). In the round performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, select a preset round performance performance pattern corresponding to the winning type and number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and send a round performance start command to the sub-RAM 94 to start the selected round performance. Set it in the command set area 94b. When the round performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, if the round designation command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it has been received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4500). The "ending performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big win game or small win game). In the ending performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command and sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, an ending performance pattern corresponding to the winning type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and an ending performance start command for starting the selected ending performance is set in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Note that if the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the above-described ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the production control microcomputer 91 receives the gaming state designation command, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives information regarding the gaming state included in the gaming state designation command (whether or not it is a high probability state, whether it is a time saving state, counter, time saving counter value, etc.) are held in the sub-RAM 94. Moreover, the production control microcomputer 91 causes the sub-RAM 94 to hold information about passing the V when receiving the V passing command. Further, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.) and ends this processing.

[Ahead production decision processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the pre-read effect determination process (FIG. 37: Step S4420). The performance control microcomputer 91 first performs advance determination information rewriting processing (step S4601). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the jackpot preliminary judgment result (jackpot judgment information), the jackpot type preliminary judgment result (jackpot type information), and the variation included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80. The pattern preliminary determination result (fluctuation pattern information) is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c. In addition to the above-mentioned jackpot judgment information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information, the advance judgment information storage area 94c stores pre-read performance pattern information. The pre-read effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the pre-read effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604, which will be described later. FIG. 39(A) shows that the jackpot judgment information “Lose” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third pieces as the preliminary judgment results corresponding to the first to third pieces of special drawing 2 pending. A state is shown in which the data is stored in a storage area, and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the variation is stored in the area. FIG. 39(B) shows that from the state of FIG. 39(A), special drawing 2 has won, and the preliminary judgment information included in the preliminary judgment command received from the main control board 80 is added to the fourth special drawing 2 pending. A state in which the data is stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, jackpot judgment information "jackpot", jackpot type information "21H", and fluctuation pattern information "P61" are stored as advance judgment information. In addition, "Pattern A" is added as pre-reading performance pattern information to the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth special drawings 2 pending and the area corresponding to the fluctuation. " is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the variation has ended from the state in FIG. 39(B) and the advance determination information shift process has been executed. Specifically, the advance determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to this area, the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and the advance determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas. 4. Pre-determination information in the storage area is cleared. The advance determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: Step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the performance control microcomputer 91 then determines whether or not pre-read performance pattern information is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not pre-read performance pattern information is stored in the corresponding area of the advance determination information storage area 94c, or any of the first to fourth storage areas. If the prefetch effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, if the pre-read effect pattern information is stored in the corresponding area of the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, or any of the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-read effect pattern information is newly selected and not stored. On the other hand, if the pre-read performance pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is a "jackpot". Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "reach with reach" (step S4603). Whether it is a "big hit" or "a hit with reach" can be determined based on, for example, the preliminary determination result of the variation pattern (variation pattern information). If the preliminary determination result included in the received preliminary determination command is "no reach loss" (step S4603: NO), the performance control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead performance. On the other hand, if the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is "Jackpot" or "Lose with reach" (step S4603: YES), a pre-read performance execution determination that determines whether or not to execute the pre-read performance; Then, prefetch effect pattern selection is performed (step S4604). Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the pre-read performance random number random number, and performs the pre-read performance by referring to the acquired random number value and the pre-read performance pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub-ROM 93. It is determined whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern when performing the pre-reading effect.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In Figure 40, if the pre-judgment result is "Jackpot" and the pre-read effect random number is "0-55", the pre-read effect is "none", and if the pre-read effect random value is "56-67", the pre-read effect is When "Pattern A" is selected and the pre-read effect random number is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the pre-read effect. In addition, if the pre-judgment result is "reach and loss" and the pre-read effect random number is "0 to 107", the pre-read effect will be "none", and if the pre-read effect random value is "108 to 114", the pre-read effect will be When "Pattern A" is selected and the pre-read effect random number is "115 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the pre-read effect. Note that the type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of random numbers to be selected can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that the pre-read effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected pre-read effect pattern is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when storing the pre-read effect pattern in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-judgment command among the first to fourth storage areas but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area are stored. A prefetch effect pattern is stored in the area and also in the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), "pattern A" is not only set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received advance determination command, but also in the first to third storage areas and the corresponding area. Set "Pattern A" to "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is executed even in the variable effects that are executed before the variable effects corresponding to the fourth storage area (variable effects corresponding to this area and the first to third storage areas). . Note that whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable performance, if the timing to execute the pre-read effect has already passed, the pre-read effect will not be executed, but if it is before the timing to execute the pre-read effect, it will be executed at that timing. This will be discussed later. In step S4604, if it is determined that the prefetch effect will not be executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variable effect start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variable performance start process (FIG. 37: Step S4460). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game status information indicating the current gaming status, symbol information indicating the symbol as a determination result of the winning determination process of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, and the like. The gaming state information and symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs basic performance pattern determination processing (step S5010). The basic performance pattern determination process includes the basic configuration of the variable performance (for example, the display and switching of background images on the image display device 7, the display of predetermined characters and their movements, the output of melodies and sound effects using the speaker 67) , lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable performance is completed by superimposing additional performances such as chance-up production and look-ahead production on top of this basic production. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines the basic performance pattern by referring to the basic performance pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub-ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the basic performance pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, there are multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform normal reach performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP1 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP2 performance, multiple types of basic performance patterns that perform SP3 performance, Multiple types of basic performance patterns are set that perform no-reach performance. The type of basic performance pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, if the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P1", the basic performance pattern for performing the SP1 performance is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", a basic performance pattern that performs a no-reach performance is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic performance pattern, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up performance pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the chance up random number counter, and determines the chance up performance pattern by referring to the acquired random number and the chance up performance pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only a portion of the chance up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variable effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation patterns included in the variation start command are "P1" to "P16". The chance-up performance pattern determination table T53 includes a portion that determines the chance-up performance pattern to be executed when the variation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". You may or may not be prepared.

In Figure 43, the chance-up effect patterns are "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", " 4-NO,” “4-SP1,” “4-SP2,” “4-SP3,” and “ANO” are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later. The type and content of the chance-up effect pattern are not limited to those mentioned above and can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up production pattern, the production control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and determines the combination of production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be stopped and displayed. may be determined. Based on these, it is determined what kind of performance will be performed as a variable performance.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized. Step S5020). When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 starts the variable effect image. The data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 sets a variable production timer (step S5030), and ends this process. A variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set in the variation effect timer.

[Processing during variable performance]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the process during fluctuation performance (FIG. 36: Step S4305). The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable performance is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the variable performance is in progress can be determined, for example, by whether or not the variable performance timer has reached zero. If the variable performance is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variable production is in progress (step SS4701: YES), the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether it is the timing to set the command before variation end to the production command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command that the production control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 etc. that it is a specific timing during the variation production, and the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command. According to the information included in the pre-variation end command, the content of the presentation is switched, a specific image is displayed, etc.

If it is not the timing to set the before-variation-end command (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the timing to set the before-variation-end command (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-read effect pattern information in the corresponding area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no pre-read effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation end command that does not include pre-read effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub-RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-read effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command including the pre-read effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variable effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a prefetch effect that displays a prefetch effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation end command is sent to the image control board 100 two seconds before the end of the variation. Here, if a preview image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts a preview fade effect to fade the preview image.

8. Operation of the image control microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIG. 45. Buffers and the like that appear in the explanation of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of display control processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads a program from the ROM 103, and after CPU initialization processing, display control processing is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variable effect start command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5001). If it has been received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts displaying a variable effect (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variable effect start command, reads out a predetermined variable effect image instructed in the variable effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Display. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5001: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a pre-variation end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts displaying a prefetch effect (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-variation end command, and if the pre-variation end command includes pre-read effect pattern information, reads a predetermined pre-read effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the image display device. 7 on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, even if the pre-variation end command does not include look-ahead effect pattern information, if a preview image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a preview fade effect that fades the preview image is performed. Let's do it. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5003: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variable effect end command has been received from the sub-control board 90 (step S5005). If it has been received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads from the ROM 103 the image in which the variable effect is stopped and displayed, and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to display the variable effect stop display. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S5005: NO), the above-mentioned process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, it reads out a predetermined opening effect image instructed by the opening effect start command from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a. Further, when a round performance start command is received, a predetermined round performance image instructed in the round performance start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image specified in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a, and this process is ended.

9. Operation of the movable accessory (the movable board 15) FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the movable accessory (the movable board 15).
The performance control microcomputer 91 controls the movement of the board movable body 15 during game performance (display performance), initial operation when power is turned on, and the like. The movable board 15 is in the home position when it is in the position shown in FIG. On the other hand, the movable platen body 15 is in the deployed position when it is in the position shown in FIG. The performance control microcomputer 91 is capable of movably controlling the board movable body 15 from the home position to the unfolded position. The board movable body 15 is basically located at the home position, and is movably controlled to the expanded position by the performance control microcomputer 91 as appropriate depending on the display performance (game performance). When the board movable body 15 is movably controlled to the deployed position, it is placed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (on the near side of the display screen 7a), in other words, when viewed from the player, the board movable body 15 is placed on the display screen 7a. is placed in a position overlapping with a predetermined area of . Therefore, in this case, the board movable body 15 is in a state of blocking a predetermined area of the display screen 7a when viewed from the player. The movable plate 15 also includes a star-shaped hole 15a in the center. Therefore, when the panel movable body 15 is in the unfolded position, a part of the display screen 7a can be seen through the hole 15a. Moreover, when the board movable body 15 is at the home position, it is in a position that does not overlap with the display screen 7a.

10. Production Examples, Effect Examples, Modifications, and Mode Examples of the Present Embodiment Each production example (display production example, role object movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, examples of effects, modifications, and examples of aspects of the production example will also be explained.
As mentioned above, the performance that will be described below is based on various information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, fluctuation pattern information, preliminary determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). Note that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, in the example of display effects, the hold display (hold icon) is omitted if it is not particularly necessary.

The button image operation effect will be explained using FIGS. 47 to 49. This button image operation performance can be executed during a decorative pattern variation performance, a reach performance (super reach performance), and the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a button image action effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen. This is a display effect to be displayed on 7a.

[Button image action production A]
FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining button image action effect A. In button image action effect A, first, the first button image display of FIG. 47(A) is executed. This first button image display is executed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols. Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the held images (held icons) 9A, 9B and the held digested images (the held icon) 9C move to the left (in the direction of the black arrow) and frame out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(B), with the first button image BI1 being displayed, the second button image BI2 is displayed in the upper left direction of the first button image BI1. A part of the second button image BI2 overlaps with the production pattern. In this specification, "images overlap" means that they appear to overlap from the player's perspective, and it does not matter whether they actually overlap or not. For example, when at least a portion of one image displayed on the display screen 7a appears to be omitted by the other image, it can be said that the images overlap.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(C), while the first button image BI1 and the second button image BI2 are displayed, the third button image BI3 is displayed in the lower right direction of the first button image BI1. . Next, as shown in FIG. 47(D), with the first button image BI1, second button image BI2, and third button image BI3 displayed, a fourth button image is displayed in the upper right direction of the first button image BI1. BI4 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(E), with the first button image BI1, second button image BI2, third button image BI3, and fourth button image BI4 displayed, the bottom left of the first button image BI1 is A fifth button image BI5 is displayed in the direction. After that, as shown in FIG. 47(F), with the first button image BI1 and the fifth button image BI5 displayed, the words "Press!!!" are written to prompt the player to operate the production button 63. An image (button operation promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operational validity period of the effect button 63 are displayed.

[Button image action production B]
FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining button image action effect B. Button image operation effect B differs from button image operation effect A in FIG. 47 in the timing at which the second to fourth button images disappear from the display screen 7a. The first button image display in FIG. 48(A) is the same as that in FIG. 47(A). That is, the first button image BI1 is displayed, and the held images (held icons) 9A and 9B and the held digested image (the held icon) 9C move leftward and frame out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(B), while the first button image BI1 is displayed, the second button image BI2 is displayed in the upper left direction of the first button image BI1. The second button image BI2 is larger than the first button image BI1. A part of the second button image BI2 overlaps with the production pattern. The second button image BI2 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined second has elapsed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(C), almost at the same time as the second button image BI2 disappears from the display screen 7a, the third button image BI3 is displayed in the lower right direction of the first button image BI1. The third button image BI3 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. The third button image BI3 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined second has elapsed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(D), almost at the same time as the third button image BI3 disappears from the display screen 7a, the fourth button image BI4 is displayed in the upper right direction of the first button image BI1. The fourth button image BI4 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. The fourth button image BI4 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined second has elapsed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(E), almost at the same time as the fourth button image BI4 disappears from the display screen 7a, the fifth button image BI5 is displayed in the lower left direction of the first button image BI1. The fifth button image BI5 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 48(F), with the first button image BI1 and the fifth button image BI5 being displayed, the button operation promotion image OPI of "Press!!!" and the timer bar TBI are displayed. Ru. The display time of the fifth button image BI5 is longer than the display time of the second to fourth button images.

[Button image action production C]
FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the button image action effect C. Button image movement effect C differs from button image movement effect B in FIG. 48 mainly in that a movement of the button image is performed. In the first button image display of FIG. 49(A), the first button image BI1 is displayed as in FIG. Icon) 9C does not move and is displayed as is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49(B), while the first button image BI1 is displayed, the second button image BI2 is displayed in the upper left direction of the first button image BI1. The second button image BI2 is larger than the first button image BI1, and is displayed at an angle with respect to the first button image BI1. A part of the second button image BI2 overlaps with the production pattern. The second button image BI2 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined second, and a ball of light image appears at the same position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49(C), the ball of light image moves to the lower right of the first button image, and at that position, the ball of light image disappears and the third button image BI3 is displayed. The third button image BI3 is larger than the first button image BI1, and is displayed at an angle with respect to the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed. The third button image BI3 disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined second, and a ball of light image appears at the same position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49(D), the ball of light image moves to the right of the first button image, and at that position, the ball of light image disappears and the fourth button image BI4 is displayed. The fourth button image BI4 is larger than the first button image BI1. The first button image BI1 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 49(E), both the fourth button image BI4 and the first button image BI1 move toward the lower left, and then stop. After that, as shown in FIG. 49(F), while the first button image BI1 and the fourth button image BI4 are displayed, the button operation promotion image OPI of "Press!!!" and the timer bar TBI are displayed. Ru. The timer bar TBI partially overlaps the fourth button image BI4. The display time of the fourth button image BI4 is longer than the display time of the second and third button images.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of button image action effects is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the first button image BI1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, and the second button image is displayed at the upper left of the first button image BI1. A first effect in which BI2 is displayed, and a second effect in which a fifth button image BI5 is displayed at the lower left of the first button image BI1 with the first button image BI1 being displayed after the first effect. You can direct and execute. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, the first effect is such that the second button image BI2 is displayed at the upper left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. After the first effect, a second effect can be performed in which the fourth button image BI4 is displayed to the left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the button images appear one after another at different positions on the display screen 7a, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, in the second effect in which the fifth button image BI5 is displayed at the lower left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed. , the second button image BI2 is not displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, in a second effect in which a fourth button image BI4 is displayed to the left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed, the second button image BI2 is Do not show. According to this configuration, it is possible to create an effect in which the button image that disappeared from the display screen 7a appears again at a different position on the display screen 7a, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, in the second effect in which the fifth button image BI5 is displayed at the lower left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed. The display time of the fifth button image BI5 is the same as that of the second button image BI2 in the first effect in which the second button image BI2 is displayed on the upper left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed. longer than display time. Also,
As shown in FIG. 49, the display time of the fourth button image BI4 in the second effect in which the fourth button image BI4 is displayed on the right side of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed is , is longer than the display time of the second button image BI2 in the first effect in which the second button image BI2 is displayed on the upper left of the first button image BI1 while the first button image BI1 is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to change the display time of the button image that appears when the first button image BI1 is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the second button image BI2 and the fifth button image BI5 are each larger than the first button image BI1. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, the second button image BI2 and the fourth button image BI4 are each larger than the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player when the button image that appears when the first button image BI1 is displayed is displayed, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the second button image BI2 is displayed tilted with respect to the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a sense of dynamism to the display of the second button image BI2 that appears while the first button image BI1 is being displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the second button image BI2 may be displayed overlapping the decorative pattern. According to this configuration, the second button image BI2 that appears when the first button image BI1 is displayed appears to be located at the back of the decorative image, which can create a sense of depth in the display and add interest. It is possible to improve the

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the button operation promotion image OPI of "Press!!!" is displayed with the fifth button image BI5 being displayed. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 49, the button operation promotion image OPI is displayed with the fourth button image BI4 being displayed. According to this configuration, since the button operation promotion image OPI appears together with the button image that appears when the first button image BI1 is displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension, and improve interest. be able to.

[Modified example]
Below, modified examples of button image action effects are shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, a presentation is performed using a button image representing the appearance of the presentation button 63. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect using an image showing the appearance of a type of operation section other than the effect button 63. For example, a similar effect may be performed using an image showing the appearance of the sword member 64 or the sword button 65 instead of the button image. Further, an image of an arbitrary operation unit such as a handle image, a lever image, a trigger image, etc. may be used. Further, in addition to the image of the operation unit, any image such as a specific character, figure, symbol, or character image may be used.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of button image action effects A to C shown in FIGS. 47 to 49 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. For example, in button image action rendering A, the pending icons 9A, 9B, and 9C are framed out of the display screen 7a, but they do not need to be framed out as in button image action rendering C. Furthermore, the button image action effects A to C may not include some of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, or may include other effect contents. Further, the button image action effects A to C may be placed at any position with respect to the positions of the button images, decorative patterns, and hold icons, without being limited to the positions shown in FIGS. 47 to 49.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, five button images (first to fifth button images) appear in FIGS. 47 and 48, and four button images (first to fourth button images) appear in FIG. 49. However, the number of button images that appear in the button image action effect may be 1 to 3, or may be 6 or more.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A1-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing an appearance of the operating means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image representing an appearance of the operating means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image representing an appearance of the operating means,
a first image in which the first image is displayed at a first position of the display means, and a second image is displayed at a second position away from the first image in a first direction; and after the first presentation, the third image is displayed at a third position away from the first image in a second direction with the first image being displayed. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing a second performance.
[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
A gaming machine characterized in that in the second performance, the second image is not displayed.
[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1 or aspect A1-2,
A gaming machine characterized in that a display time of the third image in the second effect is longer than a display time of the second image in the first effect.
[Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
The gaming machine, wherein the second image and the third image are each larger than the first image.
[Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first effect, the second image is displayed at an angle with respect to the first image.
[Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-5,
A gaming machine characterized in that in the first performance, the second image may be displayed overlapping with a decorative pattern.
[Aspect A1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-6,
One of the plurality of types of images is a fourth image for prompting the player to operate the operation unit,
A gaming machine characterized in that the fourth image is displayed at a fourth position while the third image is displayed at the third position of the display means.

The operation section enlarged display effect will be explained using FIGS. 50 to 52. This operation part enlarged display effect can be executed during a decorative pattern variation effect, a reach effect (super reach effect), or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation part enlarged display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103. This is a display effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Operation section enlarged display effect A]
FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining operation section enlarged display effect A. In operation part enlarged display performance A, first, the sword member image display of FIG. 50(A) is executed. This sword member image display is executed, for example, during the ready-to-reach effect of the decorative pattern. Here, a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center right of the display screen 7a. The sword member image ASI also includes a first sword button image PSB showing the appearance of the sword button 65. That is, since the sword button 65 is provided at the end of the handle of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1), the first sword button image PSB is drawn at the end of the sword handle represented by the sword member image ASI. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(B), with the sword member image ASI displayed, a second sword button image SBI appears from the position of the first sword button image PSB of the sword member image ASI. The second sword button image SBI is an image showing the appearance of the sword button 65, similar to the first sword button image PSB. In other words, the second sword button image SBI is an image representing a portion of the sword member image ASI (first sword button image PSB).

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(C), the second sword button image SBI moves toward the lower left while being enlarged and displayed, and stops on the left side of the sword member image ASI. As a result, while the sword member image ASI is displayed, the second sword button image SBI, which is larger than the sword member image ASI, is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(D), with the sword member image ASI and the second sword button image SBI displayed, a "Press!!!" button is pressed to prompt the player to operate the production button 63. A character image (button operation promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operational validity period of the sword button 65 are displayed. The button operation promotion image OPI and the timer bar TBI are displayed overlapping with the second sword button image SBI. In other words, the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second sword button image SBI than the sword member image ASI.

When the sword member 64 is operated by the player, the second sword button image SBI disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position, as shown in FIG. 50(E). After that, as shown in FIG. 50(F), the explosion image EXI disappears from the display screen 7a, and the effect symbols are stopped and displayed as losing symbols.

[Operation section enlarged display performance B]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining operation section enlarged display performance B. In operation section partial enlargement display effect B, first, the first button image display of FIG. 51(A) is executed. This first button image display is executed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols. Here, a first button image BI representing the appearance of the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51(B), with the first button image BI displayed, the second button image BB appears from the first button image BI. Like the first button image BI, the second button image BB is an image showing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1).

Next, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the second button image BB moves to the left while being enlarged, and stops with a part of the left side of the second button image BB out of frame from the display screen 7a. . As a result, while the first button image BI is displayed, the second button image BB, which is larger than the sword member image ASI, is displayed, although a portion of the left side is not displayed. Since both the first button image BI and the second button image BB represent the appearance of the production button 63 (FIG. 1), the second button image BB whose left part is not displayed is different from the first button image BI. This is an image representing a portion (a portion other than the left side of the production button 63).

Next, as shown in FIG. 51(D), the player is prompted to operate the production button 63 while the first button image BI and the second button image BB whose left side is partially out of frame are displayed. A character image (button operation promotion image) OPI of "Press!!!" for this purpose and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the production button 63 are displayed. The button operation promotion image OPI and the timer bar TBI are displayed to overlap with the second button image BB. In other words, the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second button image BB than to the first button image BI.

When the player operates the effect button 63, the second button image BB goes out of frame from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 51(E). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51(F), the effect symbols are stopped and displayed as losing symbols.

[Operation section enlarged display effect C]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the operation section enlarged display effect C. In operation part enlarged display performance C, first, the select button image display of FIG. 52(A) is executed. This select button image display is executed, for example, during the ready-to-reach effect of decorative symbols. Here, a select button image SSI representing the appearance of the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower right of the display screen 7a. The select button image SSI is composed of four button images corresponding to the four buttons (left button, right button, upper button, and lower button) that constitute the select button 68 (FIG. 1). Here, among the select button images SSI, the image corresponding to the left button of the select button 68 (FIG. 1) is referred to as "first left button image LI", and the image corresponding to the right button is referred to as "first right button image RI". ”. In addition to the select button image SSI, a plurality of panel images PN are displayed on the display screen 7a. A predetermined image (for example, a character image) may be drawn on each panel of the panel image PN.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(B), with the select button image SSI displayed, a second left button image PLI and a second right button image PRI are displayed below the display screen 7a. The second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI, like the first left button image LI and the first right button image RI, represent the appearance of the left button and right button of the select button image SSI. . The second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI are larger than the select button image SSI. The second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI are images representing a portion (left button and right button) of the select button image SSI.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(C), the player is prompted to operate the production button 63 while the select button image SSI, second left button image PLI, and second right button image PRI are displayed. A character image (button operation promotion image) OPI of "Press!!!" for the purpose of the selection button 68 and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the select button 68 are displayed. The timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI than the select button image SSI.

When the left button of the select button image SSI is operated by the player, the second left button image PLI changes color and is selected and enlarged in the panel image PN, as shown in FIG. 52(D). The panels that appear will be replaced. When the operation validity period of the select button 68 ends, the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI disappear from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 52(F), the selected panel image PN is displayed in an enlarged manner.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation section enlarged display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(C), when the sword member image ASI is displayed, the second sword button representing a part of the sword member image ASI (the first sword button image PSB) is displayed. It is possible to perform an effect in which the image SBI is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 51(C), while the first button image BI is displayed, a second button image BB representing a part of the first button image BI (the part other than the left side of the production button 63) is displayed. It is possible to execute the performance. Further, as shown in FIG. 52(B), in a state where the select button image SSI is displayed, a second left button image PLI and a second right button image representing a part (left button and right button) of the select button image SSI are displayed. It is possible to perform an effect in which PRI is displayed. According to these configurations, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(C), the second sword button image SBI representing a portion of the sword member image ASI (first sword button image PSB) is larger than the sword member image ASI. . Further, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the second button image BB representing a portion of the first button image BI (the portion other than the left side of the effect button 63) is larger than the first button image BI. Further, as shown in FIG. 52(B), the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI representing a portion of the select button image SSI (the left button and the right button) are larger than the select button image SSI. According to these configurations, it is possible to surprise the players and increase their interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(D), the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second sword button image SBI than the sword member image ASI. Further, as shown in FIG. 51(D), the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second button image BB than the first button image BI. Further, as shown in FIG. 52(C), the timer bar TBI is displayed at a position closer to the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI than the select button image SSI. According to these configurations, it is possible to impress the player with a more innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50(A) to 50(F), the display time of the second sword button image SBI is shorter than the display time of the sword member image ASI. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 51(A) to (F), the display time of the second button image BB is shorter than the display time of the first button image BI. Further, as shown in FIGS. 52A to 52F, the display time of the second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI is shorter than the display time of the select button image SSI. According to these configurations, it is possible to impress the player with a more innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the sword member 64 can perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65, and as shown in FIG. The member image ASI shows the part that moves during the first operation (sword member pushing operation) of the sword member 64, and the second sword button image SBI shows the part that moves when the sword member 64 is operated during the second operation (sword button pressing operation). Indicates a part that moves at times. Further, the select button 68 can perform a first operation of pressing the upper button and the lower button, and a second operation of pressing the left button and the right button, and as shown in FIG. 52, the select button image SSI is The second left button image PLI and the second right button image PRI show the parts that move during the first operation of the select button 68 (pressing the left and right buttons). Indicates the parts that move during operation. According to these configurations, it is possible to impress the player with a more innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
A modification example of the operation section enlarged display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, there is a first operation part image showing the appearance of the production button 63, the sword member 64, or the select button 68, and a second operation part image showing a part of the operation part image. The performance is performed using the operation unit image. However, the gaming machine 1 may use an image representing the appearance of a type of operation section other than the above as the first operation section image. For example, the first operation unit image may be an image of any operation unit, such as a handle image, a lever image, or a trigger image.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the operation section enlarged display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 50 to 52 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. Furthermore, the operation part enlarged display effects A to C may not include some of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 50 to 52, or may include other effect contents. Furthermore, the operating unit partial enlarged display effects A to C may be at any arbitrary positions with respect to the positions of the operating unit images, decorative patterns, and hold icons, without being limited to the positions shown in FIGS. 50 to 52.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A2-1]
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing an appearance of the operating means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image representing a part of the operating means displayed in the first image,
A gaming machine capable of executing a first effect in which the first image is displayed at a first position of the display means and the second image is displayed at a second position. .
[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
In the first effect, the second image is larger than the first image.
[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image representing an operation acceptance period of the operation means,
In the first performance, the third image is displayed at a third position of the display means that is closer to the second position than the first position.
[Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
In the first effect, the display time of the second image is shorter than the display time of the first image. The gaming machine.
[Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-4,
The operation means is capable of performing a first operation and a second operation using different operation methods,
The first image shows a portion of the operating means that is movable during the first operation,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second image shows a portion of the operating means that is movable during the second operation.

The operation unit image protrusion movement effect will be explained using FIGS. 53 to 56. This operation part image protrusion movement effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols, a reach effect (super reach effect), or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation part image protrusion movement effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103. This is a display effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Operation unit image protrusion movement effect A]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image protrusion movement effect A. In operation part image protrusion movement effect A, first, the hold icon movement effect shown in FIG. 53(A) is executed. This pending icon movement effect is executed, for example, during the ready-to-reach effect of decorative symbols. Here, the held images (held icons) 9A, 9B and the held digested images (the held icon) 9C move to the left and frame out from the display screen 7a.

Next, the enlargement button image appearance effect shown in FIG. 53(B) is executed. Specifically, a button image BB representing the appearance of the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed in an enlarged manner on the display screen 7a. Since the button image BB is displayed in an enlarged manner, the portions of the button image BB corresponding to both left and right ends of the effect button 63 are out of frame (protrude) from the display screen 7a. In other words, a portion of the button image BB is displayed such that the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the production button protrude from the display screen 7a. A part of the displayed button image BB overlaps with the production pattern.

Next, the button image left movement effect shown in FIG. 53(C) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB is reduced and displayed from the state shown in FIG. 53(B) and moved to the left, so that the left end of the button image BB is displayed on the display screen as shown in FIG. 53(C). The frame is out from 7a. Next, the button image right movement effect shown in FIG. 53(D) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB moves rightward from the state shown in FIG. 53(C), and as shown in FIG. 53(D), the right end of the button image BB is framed out of the display screen 7a. state. In other words, part of the button image BB is displayed so that the part corresponding to the right end of the effect button protrudes from the display screen 7a.

Next, the timer display effect shown in FIG. 53(E) is executed. Specifically, the timer image TN is displayed on the button image BB at the same position as in FIG. 53(B). The timer of this timer image TN is of a countdown type, and when the timer value reaches zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 53(F) is executed. Specifically, with the timer image TN displayed on the button image BB, a character image (button operation promotion image) OPI of "Press!!!" for prompting the player to operate the production button 63; A timer bar TBI indicating the operational validity period of the effect button 63 is displayed.

[Operation unit image protrusion movement effect B]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining operation section image protrusion movement effect B. The operation part image protrusion movement effect B differs from the operation part image protrusion movement effect A shown in FIG. 53 mainly in the manner in which the button image BB moves. The hold icon movement effect in FIG. 54(A) is almost the same as that in FIG. 53(A). Here, the held images (held icons) 9A and 9B and the held digested images (the held icons) 9C move downward and frame out from the display screen 7a.

Next, the reversal button image appearance effect shown in FIG. 54(B) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB representing the appearance of the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the display screen 7a in an enlarged and vertically inverted state. Since the button image BB with its top and bottom reversed is displayed in an enlarged manner, both left and right ends are out of frame from the display screen 7a. A part of the button image BB overlaps with the production pattern.

Next, the inversion button image left movement effect shown in FIG. 54(C) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB is moved to the left from the upside-down state shown in FIG. 53(B), and as shown in FIG. The portion corresponding to 2 is out of frame from the display screen 7a.

Next, the button image rotation effect shown in FIG. 54(D) is executed. Specifically, the button image BB is rotated to the right (clockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 54(C) in which the top and bottom are reversed, and then is turned to a state in which the top and bottom are not reversed through the state shown in FIG. 54(D). 54(E). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(E), a timer display effect is executed. Specifically, the timer image TN is displayed on the button image BB. The timer of this timer image TN is of a countdown type, and when the timer value reaches zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 54(F) is executed. Specifically, with the timer image TN displayed on the button image BB, a character image (button operation promotion image) OPI of "Press!!!" for prompting the player to operate the production button 63; A timer bar TBI indicating the operational validity period of the effect button 63 is displayed.

[Operation unit image protruding movement effect C]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image protrusion movement effect C. The pending icon movement effect in FIG. 55(A) is the same as that in FIG. 53(A). Next, the sword member image appearance effect shown in FIG. 55(B) is executed. Specifically, a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. At this time, the upper and lower ends of the sword member image ASI are out of frame from the display screen 7a. That is, the portions of the sword member image ASI corresponding to the tip of the sword and the tip of the handle are out of frame from the display screen 7a. The sword member image ASI moves to the left from the position shown in FIG. 55(B).

Next, the sword member image rotation effect shown in FIG. 55(C) is executed. As shown in FIG. 55(C), in the sword member image ASI after being moved to the left, only the upper end corresponding to the tip of the handle is out of frame from the display screen 7a. From this state, the sword member image ASI rotates to the right (clockwise) by approximately 45 degrees and stops at an angle (position) in which the sword of the sword member image ASI is parallel to the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

Next, the sword member image movement effect shown in FIG. 55(D) is executed. As shown in FIG. 55(D), only the upper end of the sword member image ASI after clockwise rotation is out of frame from the display screen 7a. From this state, the sword member image ASI moves downward and stops with only the lower end of the sword member image ASI out of frame from the display screen 7a.

Next, the timer display effect shown in FIG. 55(E) is executed. As shown in FIG. 55(E), only the lower end of the sword member image ASI after the downward movement is out of frame from the display screen 7a. In this state, the timer image TN is displayed on the sword member image ASI. The timer of this timer image TN is of a countdown type, and when the timer value reaches zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 55(F) is executed. Specifically, with the timer image TN displayed on the button image BB, a character image (button operation promotion image) OPI of "Press!!!" for prompting the player to operate the production button 63; A timer bar TBI indicating the operational validity period of the effect button 63 is displayed.

[Operation unit image protrusion movement effect D]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image protrusion movement effect D. The operation part image protrusion movement effect D differs from the operation part image protrusion movement effect C in FIG. 55 mainly in the shape of the sword member image ASI. The sword member 64 has a shape in which the tip portion is buried in the outer frame of the gaming machine 1 (FIG. 1). The sword member image ASI in FIG. 55 does not include an image representing the tip of the sword in accordance with the actual shape of the sword member 64. On the other hand, the sword member image ASI in FIG. 56 is an image of the entire sword including the tip portion in accordance with the conceptual shape of the sword member 64. As shown in FIG. 56(A), a reach occurs in the effect symbol variation effect. Here, the held images (held icons) 9A and 9B and the held digested images (the held icon) 9C do not move.

Next, the enlarged sword member image appearance effect shown in FIG. 56(B) is executed. Similar to FIG. 55(B), the sword member image ASI is displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 55(B), the sword member image ASI is enlarged and its shape changes to represent a state in which the sword is rotating with the longitudinal direction as the rotation axis (sword horizontal rotation). performance). In other words, the shape of the sword member image ASI changes to represent a state in which the sword member 64 is rotating with the longitudinal direction as the rotation axis. At this time, the upper and lower ends of the sword member image ASI are out of frame from the display screen 7a. That is, the portions of the sword member image ASI corresponding to the tip of the sword and the tip of the handle are out of frame from the display screen 7a. The sword member image ASI moves to the left from the position shown in FIG. 55(B).

Next, the sword member image rotation effect shown in FIG. 56(C) is executed. Similar to FIG. 55(C), in the sword member image ASI after being moved to the left, only the upper end corresponding to the tip of the handle is out of frame from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, unlike FIG. 55(C), the sword member image ASI is displayed in a reduced size and the sword horizontal rotation effect continues. Further, an image of the tip of the sword is displayed on the lower end side of the sword member image ASI. The sword member image ASI rotates to the right (clockwise) by approximately 45 degrees and stops at an angle (position) in which the sword of the sword member image ASI is parallel to the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

Next, the sword member image movement effect shown in FIG. 56(D) is executed. Similar to FIG. 55(D), only the upper end of the sword member image ASI after clockwise rotation is out of frame from the display screen 7a, and the sword sideways rotation effect continues. From this state, the sword member image ASI moves downward and stops with only the lower end of the sword member image ASI out of frame from the display screen 7a. The horizontal rotation of the sword also stops.

Next, the timer display effect shown in FIG. 56(E) is executed. Similar to FIG. 55(E), only the lower end of the sword member image ASI is out of frame from the display screen 7a. In this state, the timer image TN is displayed on the sword member image ASI. The timer of this timer image TN is of a countdown type, and when the timer value reaches zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 56(F) is executed. Similarly to FIG. 55(F), with the timer image TN displayed on the button image BB, the button operation promotion image OPI of "Press!!!" and the timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the production button 63 are displayed. is displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation unit image protrusion movement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53(B) and 54(B), the portions corresponding to both left and right ends of the production button 63 (FIG. 1) protrude from the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 53(C) and FIG. 54(C), after the first display, a part of the button image BB is displayed on the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. A second display in which a part of the button image BB is displayed so that only the part corresponding to one end of the production button 63 protrudes from the display screen 7a, and after the second display, the display shown in FIG. 53 ( D), as shown in FIG. 54(E), a part of the button image BB is moved so that only the part of the button image BB that corresponds to the other end of the production button 63 protrudes from the display screen 7a. The third display that is displayed is configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55(B) and 56(B), the portions corresponding to both the upper and lower ends of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) protrude from the display screen 7a. A first display in which a part of the sword member image ASI is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIGS. 55(C)(D) and 56(C)(D) after the first display. As shown in FIG. After the display of 2, as shown in FIGS. 55(E) and 55(E), only the portion of the sword member image ASI corresponding to the lower end of the sword member 64 protrudes from the display screen 7a. The third display in which a part of the sword member image ASI is displayed as shown in FIG. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53(C), the button image is arranged so that the part of the button image BB corresponding to the left end of the production button 63 protrudes from the display screen 7a. In the second display in which a part of the button image BB is displayed, a part of the button image BB is displayed at the left end of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. In the third display in which a portion of the button image BB is displayed such that the portion corresponding to the end protrudes from the display screen 7a, the portion of the button image BB is displayed at the right end of the display screen 7a. That is, a portion of the button image BB in the third display is displayed at a position separated to the right from the position displayed in the second display. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the second display shown in FIGS. 55(C)(D) and 56(C)(D), a portion of the sword member image ASI is displayed at the upper end of the display screen 7a In the third display shown in FIGS. 55(E) and 55(E), a portion of the sword member image ASI is displayed at the lower end of the display screen 7a. That is, a portion of the sword member image ASI in the third display is displayed at a position downwardly away from the position displayed in the second display. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a portion of the button image BB in the second display shown in FIG. 53(C) is displayed smaller than a portion of the button image BB in the first display shown in FIG. 55(B). ing. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56(B), the shape of the sword member image ASI changes to represent a state in which the sword member 64 is rotating with the longitudinal direction as the rotation axis. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 to 56, the timer image TN is displayed on the display screen 7a in the third display. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer image TN is displayed overlapping a portion of the button image BB, as shown in FIGS. 53(E) and 54(E). Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 55(E) and 56(E), the timer image TN is displayed overlapping a portion of the sword member image ASI. According to this configuration, it is possible to further impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the operation unit image protrusion movement effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, a presentation is performed using a button image BB representing the appearance of the presentation button 63. Further, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, a presentation is performed using a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect using an image showing the appearance of a type of operation section other than the effect button 63 or the sword member 64. Further, an image of an arbitrary operation unit such as a handle image, a lever image, a trigger image, etc. may be used. Further, in addition to the image of the operation unit, any image such as a specific character, figure, symbol, or character image may be used.

[Modification 2]
The shape of the button image BB shown in FIGS. 53 and 54 may change to represent a state in which the effect button 63 is rotated vertically or horizontally. The sword member image ASI shown in FIG. 55, similar to the sword member image ASI shown in FIG. You may do so.

[Modification 3]
Although the timer of the timer image TN in FIGS. 53 to 56 is of a countdown type, it may be of a count-up type. Further, the timer image TN does not need to overlap with the operation unit images such as the button image BB and the sword member image ASI.

[Modification 4]
The display contents of the operation unit image protrusion movement effects A to D shown in FIGS. 53 to 56 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. Further, the operation part image protrusion movement effects A to D may not include some of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 53 to 56, or may include other effect contents. Furthermore, the operating unit image protrusion movement effects A to D are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 53 to 56 with respect to the positions and moving directions of the operating unit images, decorative patterns, and hold icons, and may be at arbitrary positions and moving directions.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A3-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing an appearance of the operating means,
a first display in which a portion of the first image is displayed on the display means such that a portion of the first image corresponding to both ends of the operation means protrudes from the display means; After the first display, a portion of the first image is moved so that only a portion of the first image corresponding to one end of the operating means protrudes from the display means. A second display is displayed, and after the second display, only a portion of the first image corresponding to the other end of the operating means protrudes from the display means. A gaming machine capable of executing a third display in which a portion of the first image is displayed.
[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
In the second display, a portion of the first image is displayed at a first position of the display means,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the third display, a portion of the first image is displayed at a second position away from the first position in a first direction.
[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2,
A gaming machine characterized in that a portion of the first image displayed in the second display is displayed in a smaller size than a portion of the first image displayed in the first display.
[Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
A gaming machine characterized in that a portion of the first image displayed in the first display changes shape to represent a state in which the operating means is rotated.
[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the third display, a timer image is displayed on the display means.
[Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-5,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the third display, the timer image is displayed overlapping a portion of the first image.

The operation unit image protrusion display effect will be explained using FIGS. 57 to 59. This operation part image protrusion display effect may be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols, a reach effect (super reach effect), or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation part image protrusion display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103. This is a display effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Operation unit image protrusion display effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the operation section image protrusion display effect A. In the operation unit image protrusion display effect A, first, the hold icon moving effect shown in FIG. 57(A) is executed. This pending icon movement effect is executed, for example, during the ready-to-reach effect of decorative symbols. Here, the held images (held icons) 9A and 9B and the held digested images (the held icons) 9C move rightward and frame out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57(B), a button image BB representing the appearance of the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the button image BB is displayed in an enlarged manner as shown in FIG. 57(C). At this time, portions of the button image BB corresponding to both left and right ends of the production button 63 are out of frame (protrude) from the display screen 7a. In other words, a portion of the button image BB is displayed such that the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the production button protrude from the display screen 7a. A part of the button image BB overlaps with the production pattern.

Next, the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 57(D) is executed. Specifically, in order to prompt the player to operate the performance button 63 in a state where the button image BB is enlarged and the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the performance button 63 are out of frame from the display screen 7a. A character image (button operation promotion image) OPI of "Press!!!" and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the production button 63 are displayed on the button image BB.

[Operation unit image protrusion display effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image protrusion display effect B. The operation part image protrusion display effect B differs from the operation part image protrusion display effect A in FIG. 57 in the range of frame-out from the display screen 7a when the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. 58(A) and (B) are similar to FIG. 57(A) and (B).

As shown in FIG. 58(C), button image BB is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the part of the button image BB that corresponds not to the protrusion (convex part) of the production button 63 but to the annular receiving part provided around the protrusion is out of frame from the display screen 7a ( (protrudes). The effect button 63 includes not only a protrusion but also an annular receiving part around the protrusion. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 58(C) as well, it can be said that the portions of the button image BB corresponding to both left and right ends of the effect button 63 are out of frame (protrude) from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 58(D) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the button image BB is enlarged and the portions corresponding to the left and right ends of the production button 63 are out of frame from the display screen 7a, the button operation promotion image OPI and the timer bar TBI are displayed. It is displayed on the button image BB.

[Operation unit image protrusion display effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the operation section image protrusion display effect C. The operation part image protrusion display effect C differs from the operation part image protrusion display effect A in FIG. 57 in the range of frame-out from the display screen 7a when the button image BB is enlarged and displayed. 59(A) and (B) are similar to FIG. 57(A) and (B).

As shown in FIG. 59(C), button image BB is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, a portion of the button image BB corresponding to the left end of the production button 63 is out of frame (protrudes) from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 59(D) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the button image BB is enlarged and the part corresponding to the left end of the production button 63 is out of frame from the display screen 7a, the button operation promotion image OPI and the timer bar TBI are displayed on the button. Displayed on image BB.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the operation unit image protrusion display effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57(D), 58(D), and 59(D), the portion of the button image BB corresponding to at least one end of the production button 63 The first effect is such that the timer bar TBI is displayed on the display screen 7a while a part of the button image BB is displayed on the display screen 7a so that the button image BB protrudes from the display screen 7a. ing. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57(D) and 58(D), in the first effect, the portions of the button image BB corresponding to both ends of the effect button 63 are displayed on the display screen. A portion of the button image BB is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to protrude from the button image 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57(D), FIG. 58(D), and FIG. 59(D), in the first effect, the timer bar TBI overlaps a part of the button image BB. Is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, in the first effect, a decorative pattern is displayed overlapping a part of the button image BB. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the operation unit image protrusion display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, a presentation is performed using a button image BB representing the appearance of the presentation button 63. Further, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, an effect is performed using a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect using an image showing the appearance of a type of operation section other than the effect button 63, such as the sword member 64, for example. Further, an image of an arbitrary operation unit such as a handle image, a lever image, a trigger image, etc. may be used. Further, in addition to the image of the operation unit, any image such as a specific character, figure, symbol, or character image may be used.

[Modification 2]
The shape of the button image BB shown in FIGS. 57 to 59 may change to represent a state in which the effect button 63 is rotated vertically or horizontally.

[Modification 3]
The display contents of the operation unit image protrusion display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 57 to 59 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. Furthermore, the operation unit image protrusion display effects A to C may not include some of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, or may include other effect contents. Furthermore, the operation unit image protrusion display effects A to C may be at any position or movement direction without being limited to FIGS.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A4-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image representing an appearance of the operating means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image representing an operation acceptance period of the operation means,
A portion of the first image is displayed on the display means such that a portion of the first image corresponding to at least one end of the operation means protrudes from the display means. , A gaming machine capable of executing a first effect in which the second image is displayed on the display means.
[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine described in A4-1,
In the first effect, a portion of the first image is displayed on the display means such that a portion of the first image corresponding to both ends of the operation means protrudes from the display means. A gaming machine characterized by displaying.
[Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine described in A4-1 or A4-2,
A gaming machine characterized in that in the first effect, the second image is displayed overlapping a part of the first image.
[Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of A4-1 to A4-3,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first display, a decorative pattern is displayed overlapping a part of the first image.

The hold icon/operation unit image movement effect will be explained using FIGS. 60 to 63. This pending icon/operation part image movement effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols, a reach effect (super reach effect), or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the hold icon/operation part image movement effect, it reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103. This is a display effect that is read out and displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon/operation part image movement effect A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining hold icon/operation unit image movement effect A. As shown in FIG. 60(A), held images (held icons) 9A, 9B and held digested images (scheduled icons) 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, and to the left of these, a performance button 63 (see FIG. A button image BI1 representing the appearance of 1) is displayed. In this state, when the ready-to-win performance using the performance symbols is started, the pending icon movement performance shown in FIG. 60(B) is executed. Specifically, the held images (held icons) 9A and 9B and the held digested image (the held icon) 9C move rightward and frame out from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 60(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(D), after the hold icons 9A, 9B, and 9C disappear from the display screen 7a, the button image BI1 moves to the right from the lower left position of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. It stops at the lower right of the display screen 7a as shown in E). That is, the button image BI1 moves to and stops at the position where the held images (held icons) 9A, 9B and the held digested image (the held icon) 9C were displayed in FIG. 60(A). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(F), the SP reach effect is executed with the button image BI1 being displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Hold icon/operation part image movement effect B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining hold icon/operation unit image movement effect B. The hold icon/operation unit image movement effect B is different from the hold icon/operation unit image movement effect A in FIG. The operation mode of the button image BB is different.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), held images (held icons) 9A and 9B and held digested images (the held icon) 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, and a production button 63 ( A button image BI1 representing the appearance of FIG. 1) is displayed. In this state, when the ready-to-win performance using the performance symbols is started, the pending icon movement performance shown in FIG. 61(B) is executed. Specifically, among the held images (held icons) 9A and 9B and the held digested image (the held icon) 9C, only the held icon) 9B moves to the right, as shown in FIG. 61(C). The frame is taken out from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(D), the button image BI1 moves downward from a position near the middle on the right side of the display screen 7a, and stops at the lower right of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 61(E). . That is, the button image BI1 moves to the position where the pending image (pending icon) 9B was displayed in FIG. 61(A) and stops. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61(F), the SP reach effect is executed with the button image BI1 being displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Hold icon/operation part image movement effect C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon/operation unit image movement effect C. As shown in FIG. 62(A), a hold display area image HA is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, and on the hold display area image HA, hold images (hold icons) 9A, 9B, and a hold extinguished image (the hold icon) are displayed on the hold display area image HA. Icon) 9C is displayed. In this state, when the ready-to-reach effect based on the effect pattern is started, the sword member image appearance effect shown in FIG. 62(B) is executed. Specifically, a sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) appears from above the display screen 7a and moves downward. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(C), the tip of the sword member image ASI overlaps with the reserved display area image HA and becomes invisible. That is, the sword tip of the sword member image ASI is displayed as if stuck in the reserved display area image HA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(D), the entire hold display area image H including the hold images (hold icons) 9A and 9B and the hold digested image (the hold icon) 9C is moved downward and displayed. At the same time as the screen 7a is framed out, the sword member image ASI moves downward from near the left center of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the sword member image ASI stops at the lower left of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 62(E). That is, as shown in FIGS. 62(D) and 62(E), the held images (held icons) 9A, 9B and the held digested images (the held icon) 9C move downward and frame out from the display screen 7a, At the same time, the sword member image ASI moves to and stops at the position where the reserved images (reserved icons) 9A, 9B and the retained digested image (relevant retained icon) 9C were displayed in FIG. 62(C). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(F), the SP reach effect is executed with the sword member image ASI displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Hold icon/operation unit image movement effect D]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon/operation unit image movement effect D. In FIG. 63(A), similarly to FIG. 62(A), a hold display area image HA is displayed below the display screen 7a, and on the hold display area image HA, hold images (hold icons) 9A, 9B, and A pending digested image (the pending icon) 9C is displayed. In this state, when the ready-to-reach effect based on the effect pattern is started, the sword member image appearance effect shown in FIG. 63(B) is executed. Specifically, the sword member image ASI representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (FIG. 1) appears from above the display screen 7a and moves diagonally to the left, and at the left end of the display screen 7a, the sword member image ASI appears from above the display screen 7a. The tip of the sword is stopped and displayed in a state where it is out of frame (protruding) from the display screen 7a. That is, the sword tip of the sword member image ASI is displayed as if stuck in the left end of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63(C) and 63(D), the entire pending display area image H including the pending images (pending icons) 9A, 9B and the pending digested image (the pending icon) 9C is moved to the left. It moves and frames out from the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 63(E), a sword member image movement effect is executed in which the sword member image ASI moves downward from near the left center of the display screen 7a and then stops. That is, in the sword member image movement effect, the sword member image ASI is moved to the position where the reserved images (reserved icons) 9A, 9B and the retained digested image (relevant suspended icon) 9C were displayed in FIG. 63(B). and stop. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63(F), the SP reach effect is executed with the sword member image ASI displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Here, the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size and moved to the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the character image CRA is displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold icon/operation unit image movement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60(A), held images (hold icons) 9A, 9B and held extinguished images (the held icon) 9C are displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. , a first effect in which the button image BI1 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 60(B), the hold icons 9A, 9B, and the hold icon 9C move to the right. , as shown in FIG. 60(D), the button image BI1 moves from the lower left to the lower right of the display screen 7a, and the second button image BI1 stops at the position where the hold icons 9A, 9B, and the hold icon 9C were. It is configured to be able to perform. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61(A), held images (held icons) 9A and 9B and held digested images (the held icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and near the center right of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 61(B), the hold icon 9B moves to the right, and as shown in FIG. 61(D), the button image BI1 is displayed. It is configured to be able to execute a second effect in which the screen 7a moves from near the center right to the lower right and stops at the position where the hold icon 9B was. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62(C), held images (held icons) 9A and 9B and held digested images (the held icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and near the left of the center of the display screen 7a. As shown in FIG. 62(D), the holding icons 9A and 9B, the holding icon 9C, and the sword member image ASI move downward, and The icons 9A, 9B and a second effect of stopping at the position where the pending icon 9C was located are configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63(B), held images (held icons) 9A and 9B and held digested images (the held icon) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and a sword is displayed at the left end of the display screen 7a. In the first production in which the component image ASI is displayed, as shown in FIG. 63(C), the holding icons 9A, 9B, and the holding icon 9C move to the left, as shown in FIG. 63(E). , the sword member image ASI is configured to be able to perform a second effect in which it moves downward and stops at the position where the pending icons 9A, 9B and the pending icon 9C were located. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with other images (for example, the operation unit image), and as the hold icon moves, the other images Move to the location where the hold icon was. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, operation unit images such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI are displayed on the display screen 7a together with other images (for example, a hold icon), As the other images move, the operation unit image moves to the position where the other images were. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 63, the operation unit images such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI are moved after the hold icons 9A, 9B, and 9C disappear from the display screen 7a. Start. Further, as shown in FIG. 61, the button image BI1 starts moving after the pending icon 9B disappears from the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 62, the operation unit images such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI are moved to the position where the pending icon was located after the pending icon has been moved. Stop at that position. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the button image BI1 moves in a direction different from the moving direction of the hold icon. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the hold icon/operation unit image movement effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the operation unit image (here, the button image BI1 or the sword member image ASI), and as the hold icon moves, the operation unit The image moves to the position where the hold icon was. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect using the hold icon and a specific image other than the operation unit image. The specific image is an image including arbitrary characters, figures, symbols, etc., such as character images. That is, the game machine 1 executes an effect in which the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with a specific image other than the operation unit image, and as the hold icon moves, the specific image moves to the position where the hold icon was. Good too. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, the operation unit images such as the button image BI1 and the sword member image ASI are displayed together with the hold icon on the display screen 7a, and as the hold icon moves, the operation unit image is placed on hold. Move to the position where the icon was. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect using the operation unit image and a specific image other than the hold icon. The specific image is an image including arbitrary characters, figures, symbols, etc., such as character images. That is, the gaming machine 1 executes an effect in which a specific image other than the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with the operation unit image, and as the specific image moves, the operation unit image moves to the position where the specific image was located. You may. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modification 3]
The gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect using a first specific image other than the hold icon and a second specific image other than the operation unit image. That is, in the gaming machine 1, a first specific image other than the hold icon is displayed on the display screen 7a together with a second specific image other than the operation unit image, and as the first specific image moves, the second specific image changes to the first specific image. You may perform an effect of moving to the position where the image was. The first specific image and the second specific image are images including arbitrary characters, figures, symbols, etc., such as character images. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modification 4]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, a performance is performed using an operation unit image showing the appearance of the performance button 63 or the sword member 64. However, the gaming machine 1 may use an image showing the external appearance of a type of operation section other than the above as the operation section image. For example, the operation unit image may be an image of any operation unit, such as a handle image, a lever image, or a trigger image.

[Modification 5]
The display contents of the hold icon/operation unit image movement effects A to D shown in FIGS. 60 to 63 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. Furthermore, the pending icon/operation part image movement effects A to D may not include some of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, or may include other effect contents. In addition, the hold icon/operation part image movement effects A to D are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 60 to 63, but may be any position or movement direction with respect to the position or movement direction of the operation part image, decorative pattern, or hold icon. good.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
a first effect in which the first image is displayed in a first position of the display means and the second image is displayed in a second position; A gaming machine capable of executing a second effect in which the second image moves from the second position in a first direction and the second image moves from the second position to the first position.
[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first image is a hold icon.
[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2 further includes:
Equipped with operating means that can be operated by the operator,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second image is an image representing an external appearance of the operating means.
[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3,
In the second effect, the second image is moved from the second position to the first image after the first image moves from the first position to the first direction and disappears from the display means. A gaming machine characterized by starting movement to a first position.
[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
In the second performance, the second image moves from the second position to the first position and then stops at the first position.
[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-5,
In the second effect, the second image moves in a second direction different from the first direction.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can also be implemented in the following manner.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
a first effect in which the first image is displayed in a first position of the display means and the second image is displayed in a second position; A gaming machine capable of executing a second effect in which the second image moves from the second position in a first direction, and the second image moves from the second position in a second direction.
[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first image is a hold icon.
[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2 further includes:
Equipped with operating means that can be operated by the operator,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second image is an image representing an external appearance of the operating means.
[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3,
In the second effect, the second image is moved in the second direction after the first image moves from the first position in the first direction and disappears from the display means. A gaming machine characterized by starting movement.
[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-4,
The gaming machine characterized in that in the second performance, the second image moves from the second position to the first position.
[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5,
In the second effect, the second image moves from the second position to the first position and then stops at the first position.

The hold icon/operation unit image superimposition effect will be explained using FIGS. 64 to 66. This pending icon/operation unit image superimposition effect may be executed during execution of the variation effect, particularly immediately before the start of variation of the decorative pattern or immediately after stop display. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the variable effect start command from the sub-control board 90, it is executed based on the content of the variable effect start command and the previously received held ball count command.

[Hold icon/operation unit image superimposed effect A]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon/operation unit image superimposition effect A. As shown in FIG. 64(A), held images (held icons) 9A, 9B and held digested images (scheduled icons) 9C are displayed below the display screen 7a, and above these, a performance button 63 (see Fig. 64A) is displayed. A button image BI1 representing the appearance of 1) is displayed. In this state, when the performance symbols are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) and the pending icon disappears, the first pending icon movement start performance shown in FIG. 64(B) is executed. Specifically, the rightmost first hold icon 9A of the hold images (hold icons) 9A moves diagonally upward to the right. That is, it moves toward button image BI1. The first pending icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1 at the position of the button image BI1, and the overlapping portion becomes invisible. As mentioned above, in this specification, "images overlap" means that they appear to overlap from the player's perspective, and it does not matter whether they actually overlap or not. For example, if at least a portion of the first reservation icon 9A displayed on the display screen 7a appears to be missing due to the button image BI1, it can be said that the images overlap.

Next, the first pending icon invisible effect shown in FIG. 64(C) is executed. Specifically, due to the movement of the first pending icon 9A, the entire first pending icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1, and the entire first pending icon 9A becomes invisible. Next, the first pending icon appearance effect shown in FIG. 64(D) is executed. Specifically, the first pending icon 9A appears from a part of the button image BI1 while moving toward the lower right. Thereafter, the holding position movement completion effect shown in FIG. 64(E) is executed. Specifically, the first hold icon that appears from a part of the button image BI1 moves directly to the lower right and stops at the hold position where the hold icon 9C is placed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64(F), a variation effect of the decorative pattern is started.

[Hold icon/operation unit image superimposed effect B]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon/operation unit image superimposition effect B. The pending icon/operation unit image superimposed effect B differs from the superimposed effect A in FIG. 64 in that the pending image (pending icon) 9B is not displayed, the position of the button image BB, etc.

As shown in FIG. 65(A), a hold image (hold icon) 9A and a hold digested image (the hold icon) 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed. A button image BI1 representing the appearance of the performance button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed between the holding position and the holding position. In this state, when the performance symbols are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) and the pending icon disappears, the first pending icon movement start performance shown in FIG. 65(B) is executed. Specifically, the rightmost first hold icon 9A of the hold images (hold icons) 9A moves to the right. That is, it moves toward button image BI1. The first pending icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1 on the left side of the button image BI1, and the overlapping portion becomes invisible.

Next, the first pending icon invisible effect shown in FIG. 65(C) is executed. Specifically, by moving the first pending icon 9A to the right, the entire first pending icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1, and the entire first pending icon 9A becomes invisible. Next, the first pending icon appearance effect shown in FIG. 65(D) is executed. Specifically, the first pending icon 9A appears from the right side of the button image BI1 while moving rightward. That is, the first pending icon 9A appears from the opposite side (the right side of the button image BI1) from the position where it was before being hidden by the button image BI1 (the left side of the button image BI1). Thereafter, the holding position movement completion effect shown in FIG. 65(E) is executed. Specifically, the first hold icon that appears from the right end of the button image BI1 moves rightward and stops at the hold position where the hold icon is placed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(F), a variation effect of the decorative pattern is started.

[Hold icon/operation unit image superimposed effect C]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon/operation unit image superimposition effect C. In the hold icon/operation unit image superimposed effect C, the hold icon 9C is not displayed, and the button image BB is the hold position.

As shown in FIG. 66(A), a hold icon 9A and a button image BI1 are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. In this state, when the performance symbols are stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the first pending icon movement start performance shown in FIG. 66(B) is executed. Specifically, the rightmost first hold icon 9A of the hold images (hold icons) 9A moves to the right. That is, it moves toward button image BI1. The first pending icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1 on the left side of the button image BI1, and the overlapping portion becomes invisible.

Next, the first pending icon invisible effect shown in FIG. 66(C) is executed. Specifically, by moving the first pending icon 9A to the right, the entire first pending icon 9A overlaps the button image BI1, and the entire first pending icon 9A becomes invisible. Next, the button image light emission effect shown in FIG. 66(D) is executed. Specifically, the button image BI1 emits light in a specific color to indicate a state equivalent to the case where the hold icon is located at the hold position. This button image light emission effect is equivalent to the holding position movement completion effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(E), a variation effect of the decorative pattern is started.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the hold icon/operation unit image superimposition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the first effect in which the first hold icon 9A and the button image BI1 are displayed, and the first hold icon 9A at the position of the button image BI1 It is configured to be able to execute a second effect in which the button image BI1 moves toward the button image BI1 and becomes invisible by overlapping the button image BI1 at the position of the button image BI1. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, after the second effect in which the first pending icon 9A overlaps with the button image BI1 and becomes invisible, the first pending icon 9A changes from the button image BI1. It is configured to be able to execute the third effect that appears. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, in the third effect in which the first pending icon 9A appears from the button image BI1, the first pending icon 9A is the first pending icon before moving in the button image BI1. It is configured to appear from the side (right side) opposite to the position where 9A was located (left side). According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, after the third effect in which the first hold icon 9A appears from the button image BI1, the first hold icon 9A stops at the hold position. It is configured to be able to perform the effects of 4. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the hold icon overlaps with another image (in this case, the button image BI1) and becomes invisible, thereby improving the interest. be able to.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, another image (here, the hold icon) moves toward the button image BI1, and the other image appears to overlap with the button image BI1. Since the performance is performed in such a way that the game disappears, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the hold icon/operation unit image superimposition effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the first effect is that the first hold icon 9A and the button image BI1 are displayed, and the first hold icon 9A moves toward the position of the button image BI1. However, it is configured to be able to execute a second effect in which the button image BI1 overlaps with the button image BI1 and becomes invisible at the position of the button image BI1. However, in the gaming machine 1, a specific image other than the hold icon 9A is displayed together with the operation unit image (here, the button image BI1), the specific image moves toward the position of the operation unit image, and the operation unit image is moved toward the position of the operation unit image. An effect may be performed in which the control unit image overlaps with the operation unit image at the position and becomes invisible. The specific image is an image including arbitrary characters, figures, symbols, etc., such as character images. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, the first effect is that the first hold icon 9A and the button image BI1 are displayed, and the first hold icon 9A moves toward the position of the button image BI1. However, it is configured to be able to execute a second effect in which the button image BI1 overlaps with the button image BI1 and becomes invisible at the position of the button image BI1. However, in the gaming machine 1, the first hold icon 9A is displayed together with a specific image other than the operation unit image, the first hold icon 9A moves toward the specific image position, and the first hold icon 9A moves toward the specific image position. It is also possible to perform an effect in which the image overlaps with the image and becomes invisible. The specific image is an image including arbitrary characters, figures, symbols, etc., such as character images. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the button image BI1 is shown as an example of the operation unit image in FIGS. 64 to 66, but an operation unit image other than the button image may be used. The operation unit image may be, for example, a sword member image, a sword button image, or a select button image.

[Modification 4]
The display contents of the hold icon/operation unit image superimposed effects A to C shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. Further, the hold icon/operation unit image superimposed effects A to C may not include some of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, or may include other effect contents. In addition, the hold icon/operation unit image superimposition effects A to C are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, but may be any position or movement direction of the operation unit image, decorative pattern, or hold icon. good.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
a first effect in which the first image is displayed in a first position of the display means and the second image is displayed in a second position; A gaming machine capable of executing a second effect in which the game machine moves from a position toward the second position and becomes invisible by overlapping with the second image at the second position.
[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1 further includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that, after the second performance, a third performance in which the first image appears from the second image can be executed.
[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
The first image of the third effect appears from a side opposite to a side facing the first position in the second image.
[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2 or aspect B3-3 further includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that, after the third performance, a fourth performance can be executed in which the first image stops at a third position.
[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first image is a hold icon.
[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-5 further includes:
Equipped with operating means that can be operated by the operator,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second image is an image representing an external appearance of the operating means.

The hold icon non-display effect will be explained using FIGS. 67 to 69. This hold icon non-display performance can be executed during a decorative pattern variation performance, a reach performance (super reach performance), or the like. Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 may receive and execute the pre-variation end command from the sub-control board 90 and may be displayed as one of the pre-read effects.

[Hold icon hidden effect A]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining pending icon non-display effect A. As shown in FIG. 67(A), four panel images PN are displayed in the area below the display screen 7a where the pending image (pending icon) 9A is displayed. The hold icon 9A is displayed on each of these four panel images PN. Here, since there are three pending icons 9A, in the display area of the pending icons 9A, the pending icons 9A are displayed on the first to third panel images PN from the right, and on the leftmost panel image PN. The hold icon 9A is not displayed. Hereinafter, in the panel represented by panel image PN, the side on which the pending icon 9A is displayed will be referred to as the "front side", and the opposite side will also be referred to as the "back side". Note that in FIG. 67(A), the hold icon 9C is also displayed on a different panel image from the panel image PN.

At a specific timing during the fluctuation, the panel rotation effect shown in FIG. 67(B) is executed. Specifically, in any panel image PN among the panel images PN on which the hold icon 9A is displayed (here, the first to third panel images PN from the right of the four panel images PN), the panel The image changes so that it is horizontally rotated. Then, the hold icon non-display effect shown in FIG. 67(C) is executed. Specifically, the panel image PN in which the image has changed so that the panel is horizontally rotated becomes an image with the panel facing down. That is, the panel image PN is an image in which the opposite side (back side) of the panel surface to the side on which the pending icon 9A was displayed is displayed. As a result, the pending icon 9A displayed on this panel image PN becomes non-displayed. That is, in the display area of the hold icon 9A on the display screen 7a, the hold icon is visible when the front image is displayed, and becomes invisible when the back image is displayed.

Next, a panel rotation effect shown in FIG. 68(D) is executed. Specifically, the panel image PN in which the hold icon 9A is not displayed changes so that the panel continues to rotate horizontally, rotates once, and returns to the side where the hold icon 9A was displayed. (front) will be displayed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 68(E), the hold icon 9A is changing (holding change). In FIG. 68(F), a shift effect is shown. After the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed, the pending icons 9A displayed on each panel image PN are moved one by one to the right panel image PN. The hold icon 9A displayed on the rightmost panel image PN moves to the panel image where the hold is displayed, and is displayed on that panel.

[Hold icon hidden effect B]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining pending icon non-display effect B. Pending icon non-display effect B differs from non-display effect A in FIG. 67 in that a frame area image HA is displayed around the panel image PN. As shown in FIG. 68(A), a frame area image HA is displayed in a region below the display screen 7a where the pending image (pending icon) 9A and the pending icon 9C are displayed. Four panel images PN are displayed in the area where the pending icon 9A is displayed in the frame area image HA. One panel image is displayed in the area of the frame area image HA where the pending icon 9C is displayed. In other words, the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed is divided into four areas by the frame area image HA. The hold icon 9A is displayed on each of the four panel images PN arranged in the area partitioned by the frame area image HA. In the display area of the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A is displayed in the first to third panel images PN from the right, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed in the leftmost panel image PN. The operation of each panel image PN is the same as that of non-display effect A in FIG. 67, so the explanation will be omitted.

[Pending icon hidden effect C]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon non-display effect C. The pending icon non-display effect C differs from the non-display effect A in FIG. 67 in that the pupil frame image EF is displayed instead of the panel image PN. As shown in FIG. 69(A), four pupil frame images EF are displayed in the area below the display screen 7a where the pending image (pending icon) 9A is displayed. The hold icon 9A is displayed inside this pupil frame image EF. The hold icon 9A displayed inside the pupil frame image EF is displayed to be the iris of the pupil. Here, since there are three pending icons 9A, in the display area of the pending icons 9A, the pending icons 9A are displayed in the first to third pupil frame images EF from the right, and the leftmost pupil frame image is displayed. The hold icon 9A is not displayed on EF. Hereinafter, the state in which the eyelid represented by the pupil frame image EF is open and the pending icon 9A is displayed will be referred to as an "open eyelid state", and the state in which the eyelid is closed and the pending icon 9A cannot be seen will also be referred to as a "closed eyelid state". . Here, the hold icon 9C is also displayed in another pupil frame image different from the pupil frame image EF.

At a specific timing during the fluctuation, the eyelid closing effect shown in FIG. 69(B) is executed. Specifically, any pupil frame image among the pupil frame images EF (here, the first to third pupil frame images EF from the right of the four pupil frame images EF) on which the pending icon 9A is displayed. In EF, an eyelid image appears and the image changes as if the eye is closed. Then, the hold icon non-display effect shown in FIG. 69(C) is executed. Specifically, the pupil frame image EF in which the image has changed so that the eyes are closed becomes an image in which the eyes are completely closed by the eyelids (eyelid closed state). That is, the pupil frame image EF is an image in which the reserved icon 9A in the iris of the eye is completely hidden by the eyelid. As a result, the pending icon 9A displayed in this pupil frame image EF becomes non-displayed.

Next, the eyelid opening effect shown in FIG. 69(D) is executed. Specifically, the pupil frame image EF in a state where the eye is completely closed by the eyelid (closed eyelid state) changes so that the eyelid opens again. When the eyelid state changes from the closed eyelid state to the open eyelid state, the hold icon 9A changes (hold change) as shown in FIG. 69(E). In FIG. 69(F), a shift effect is shown. After the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed, the pending icons 9A displayed in each pupil frame image EF move one by one to the right pupil frame image EF. The hold icon 9A displayed in the rightmost pupil frame image EF moves to the pupil frame image where the hold is displayed, and is displayed as the iris of the pupil frame image.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold icon hiding effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, in the display area of the pending icon 9A, when the panel image PN is displaying the surface of the panel, the pending icon 9A can be displayed, When the back side of the panel is displayed, the hold icon 9A becomes invisible. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, in the display area of the hold icon 9A, when the pupil frame image EF is in the open eyelid state, the hold icon 9A can be displayed, and when the eyelid is closed, the hold icon 9A is not visible. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, when the hold icon 9A is displayed while the panel image PN is displaying the front surface of the panel, the hold icon 9A is Image PN is displayed overlapping a part of the surface of the panel. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, when the hold icon 9A is displayed when the pupil frame image EF is in an open eyelid state, the hold icon 9A overlaps a part (the white part of the eye) of the pupil frame image EF. Is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the panel image PN representing the front side of the panel, and then the panel image PN is switched to the display on the back side of the panel, A first effect in which the hold icon 9A becomes invisible can be executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, the hold icon 9A is displayed on the pupil frame image EF representing the open eyelid state, and then the pupil frame image EF switches to the display of the closed eyelid state, and the hold icon 9A disappears from the first It is possible to perform the following. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, after the first effect in which the hold icon 9A becomes invisible, the panel image PN is switched from the back side of the panel to the front side, and the hold icon 9A that has disappeared from view is displayed. A second effect in which the icon 9A is displayed again can be performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 69, after the first effect in which the hold icon 9A becomes invisible, the pupil frame image EF switches from the closed eyelid state to the open eyelid state, and the hold icon 9A that has become invisible is displayed again. The second performance can be performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, when the suspended icon 9A that has become invisible is displayed again, an effect is created in which the suspended icon 9A changes from the state before it became invisible (suspended change). executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, each display area of the hold icon 9A is divided by a frame area image HA. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the hold icon non-display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
Although the frame area image HA is not displayed in FIG. 69, the frame area image HA may be displayed. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a shutter opens and closes instead of the eyelids.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the pending icon non-display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 67 to 69 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. Further, the pending icon non-display effects A to C may not include some of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, or may include other effect contents. Further, the hold icon non-display effects A to C are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 67 to 69 with respect to the decorative pattern, the position and movement direction of the hold icon, and may be any position or movement direction.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of pending icons,
Either the first display or the second display can be displayed in each display area where each hold icon is displayed,
The hold icon can be displayed in the display area where the first display is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized in that the hold icon is no longer visible in the display area where the second display is displayed.
[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
When the hold icon is displayed in the display area where the first display is displayed, the hold icon is displayed overlapping a part of the first display. .
[Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or aspect B4-2,
After the hold icon is displayed in the display area where the first display is displayed, the display in the display area switches from the first display to the second display, and the hold icon disappears from view. A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute the effect of item 1.
[Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
After the first effect, a second effect can be executed in which the display in the display area is switched from the second display to the first display, and the suspended icon is displayed again. A gaming machine that does.
[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second performance, a performance is performed in which the pending icon that is displayed again changes from a state before it disappears from view.
[Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-5,
A gaming machine characterized in that each of the display areas is divided by a frame image.

The operation count performance will be explained below using FIGS. 70 to 72. This operation count performance is performed in parallel with the variation performance of decorative symbols. Of course, this includes during execution such as reach performance (super reach performance).

[Operation count performance A]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining operation count effect A.
First, in operation count effect A, as shown in FIG. 70(A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start performance, the decorative pattern that is being varied is displayed in the upper left corner. Furthermore, at the bottom of the screen, held images 9A, 9B and held digested images 9C are displayed. The held images 9A, 9B and the held digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(B), a sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, a sword image KG representing the sword member 64 appears from above on the right side of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG that moves downward in the sword movement effect stops.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), a count effect (initial stage) is executed. In the count performance (initial stage), "5" is displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG. Then, a countdown is displayed in the order of "5" → "4" → "3" → "2" → "1".

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(E), a count performance (final stage) is executed. In the count performance (final stage), "0" is displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG. This is the display following "1" in the countdown display described above.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70(F), a button press instruction effect is executed. In the button press instruction performance, an image instructing the user to press the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 is displayed. Specifically, a text image TG saying "Press!" is displayed along with an arrow image YG instructing to press the button image BG.

[Operation count performance B (success)]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining operation count effect B (success).
First, in operation count effect B (success), a variation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 71(A). In this variation start performance, the decorative pattern that is being varied is displayed in the upper left corner. Furthermore, at the bottom of the screen, held images 9A, 9B and held digested images 9C are displayed. The held images 9A, 9B and the held digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), a sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, a sword image KG representing the sword member 64 appears from above on the right side of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG, which moves downward in the sword movement effect, moves to the left while rotating clockwise and stops at the lower left corner of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), a count effect (initial stage) is executed. In the count effect (initial stage), "5" is displayed so as to overlap the button image BG indicating the sword button 65. Then, a countdown is displayed in the button image BG in the order of "5" → "4" → "3" → "2" → "1". Also, at this time, the characters "Wait..." are displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(E), a count performance (final stage) is executed. In the count performance (final stage), "0" is displayed on the handle part EG of the sword image KG. This is the display following "1" in the countdown display described above. Also at this time, the characters "Wait..." are displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71(F), a button press instruction effect is executed. In the button press instruction performance, an image instructing the user to press the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 is displayed. Specifically, a text image TG saying "Press!" is displayed along with an arrow image YG instructing to press the button image BG.

[Operation count performance B (failure)]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining operation count performance B (failure).
First, in operation count effect B (failure), a variation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 72(A). In this variation start performance, the decorative pattern that is being varied is displayed in the upper left corner. Furthermore, at the bottom of the screen, held images 9A, 9B and held digested images 9C are displayed. The held images 9A, 9B and the held digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), a sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, a sword image KG representing the sword member 64 appears from above on the right side of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG, which moves downward in the sword movement effect, moves to the left while rotating clockwise and stops at the lower left corner of the screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), a count effect (initial stage) is executed. In the count performance (initial stage), "5" is displayed so as to overlap the button image BG indicating the sword button 65. Then, a countdown is displayed in the button image BG in the order of "5" → "4". Also, at this time, the characters "Wait..." are displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG.
Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 72(A) to 72(D) are similar to the operation count effect B (success) shown in FIG. 71.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(E), a count effect (middle period) is executed. In the count performance (mid-term), "3" is displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG. This is the display following "4" in the countdown display described above. Also at this time, the characters "Wait..." are displayed on the handle portion EG of the sword image KG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 72(F), a continuous fluctuation effect is executed. In the continuous variation effect, the sword image KG is no longer displayed, and the effect is similar to the variation start effect shown in FIG. 72(A). In other words, the countdown display is interrupted at "3" and an effect similar to the variation start effect is performed.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects in this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, a countdown is displayed using a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64. When the countdown display becomes "0", a button press instruction effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 70(E) and 71(E). According to this configuration, by displaying a countdown using a part of the sword image KG, it is possible to make the user look forward to operating the sword button 65, and it is possible to increase interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, a countdown is displayed superimposed on the button image BG of the sword image KG. When the countdown display becomes "0", a button press instruction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 71(E). According to this configuration, by superimposing the countdown on the button image BG, it is possible to make the user look forward to operating the sword button 65, and it is possible to increase interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, a countdown is displayed superimposed on the button image BG of the sword image KG, and "Wait..." is displayed on the handle part EG of the sword image KG. characters are displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the user look forward to operating the sword button 65, and it is possible to increase interest.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, when the countdown display superimposed on the button image BG of the sword image KG disappears midway, the continuous fluctuation effect as shown in FIG. 72(E) is performed, and the button press instruction effect as shown in FIG. 71(E) is not performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a variety of games and increase interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the sword stop effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG, which moves downward in the sword movement effect, moves to the left while rotating clockwise and stops at the lower left corner of the screen. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

[Modified example]
Modifications of this embodiment will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, a countdown is displayed using a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64. When the countdown display becomes "0", a button press instruction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 70(E) and FIG. 71(E), but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the button press instruction effect may be executed even if the countdown display does not reach "0".
[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, a countdown is displayed using a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64, but the present invention is not limited to this. It's not something you can do. For example, it may be a count-up instead of a count-down.
[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, a countdown is displayed using a part of the sword image KG showing the sword member 64, but the present invention is not limited to this. It's not something you can do. For example, the display does not need to be a counting display, and a time display such as "5 seconds remaining" may be displayed at a certain timing.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B5-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising: a display means capable of displaying an image of the operation means,
A gaming machine characterized in that a part of the image of the operating means is used to display a time until the operating means becomes operable.
[Aspect B5-2]
A gaming machine characterized in that a time period until the operating means becomes operable is displayed superimposed on an image showing a movable part of the operating means.
[Aspect B5-3]
A time period until the operating means becomes operable is displayed, and another part of the image of the operating means is used to display that the operation of the operating means is on hold. A gaming machine that does.
[Aspect B5-4]
A gaming machine characterized in that the operating means cannot be operated if the time display ends midway.
[Aspect B5-5]
A gaming machine characterized in that, when displaying the time until the operating means becomes operable, an image of the operating means is displayed in a corner portion of the display means.

The timer image movement effect will be explained using FIGS. 73 to 75. This timer image movement effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols, a ready-to-reach effect (super reach effect), or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a timer image movement effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen. This is a display effect to be displayed on 7a.

[Timer image movement effect A]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining timer image movement effect A. In timer image movement effect A, first, the button image display of FIG. 73(A) is executed. This button image display is executed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols. Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a wall image HA is displayed above the first button image BI1. The wall image HA partially overlaps the first button image BI1, and slides to the left at a predetermined timing.

Next, the first timer image display of FIG. 73(B) is executed. Specifically, as the wall image HA slides to the left, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right end of the wall image HA. The first timer image TN1 appearing from the right end of the wall image HA is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position (first position) on the wall image HA, and partially overlaps with the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of a countdown type. Next, the timer image movement effect shown in FIG. 73(C) is executed. Specifically, as the wall image HA further slides to the left, the first timer image TN1 moves to the left from the first position. Further, a light emitting effect is performed in which the first button image BI1 emits light in a predetermined color, and after the start of this light emitting effect, a second timer image TN2 appears from the right end of the wall image HA. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type.

Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 73(D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer image TN2 appearing from the right end of the wall image HA is stopped and displayed at the first position on the wall image HA. At this time, the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the second position on the wall image HA. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed on the left side of the current wall image HA, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed on the right side of the wall image HA. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed at positions adjacent to each other, and each partially overlaps the first button image BI1.

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 73(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the wall image HA, a character image of "Press!" (button operation) is displayed to prompt the player to operate the production button 63. Promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operational validity period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position, as shown in FIG. 73(F). After that, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed as losing symbols.

[Timer image movement effect B]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining timer image movement effect B. In timer image movement effect B, first, the button image display of FIG. 74(A) is executed. Similar to FIG. 73(A), this button image display is executed, for example, during the ready-to-reach effect of decorative symbols. Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a stage image ST is displayed below the first button image BI1, and the image configuration is such that the first button image BI1 is placed on the stage image ST. The stage image ST and the first button image BI1 are transformed at predetermined timing so that the stereoscopic images of the button and the stage are horizontally rotated. Hereinafter, this image transformation will also be referred to as horizontal rotation effect.

Next, the first timer image display of FIG. 74(B) is executed. Specifically, as the stage image ST and the first button image BI1 are horizontally rotated, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right side of the stage image ST. The first timer image TN1 appearing from the right side of the stage image ST is displayed on the stage image ST and is adjacent to the first button image BI1. The horizontal rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1 is temporarily stopped, and the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the first position. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of a countdown type.

Next, the timer image movement effect shown in FIG. 74(C) is executed. Specifically, as the horizontal rotation effect of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1 is restarted, the first timer image TN1 moves leftward from the first position. Along with the horizontal rotation effect, a light emission effect in which the first button image BI1 emits light in a predetermined color is performed, and after the start of this light emission effect, a second timer image TN2 appears from the right side of the stage image ST. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type.

Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 74(D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer image TN2 appearing from the right side of the stage image ST temporarily stops the horizontal rotation of the stage image ST and the first button image BI1, and is stopped and displayed at the first position. . At this time, the first timer image TN1 is stopped and displayed at the second position. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed on the left side of the stage image ST, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed on the right side of the stage image ST. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed at positions adjacent to each other, and are each adjacent to the first button image BI1.

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 74(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the stage image ST, a character image (button Operation promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position, as shown in FIG. 74(F). After that, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed as losing symbols.

[Timer image movement effect C]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining timer image movement effect C. In the timer image movement effect C, first, the button image display of FIG. 75(A) is executed. Similar to FIG. 73(A), this button image display is executed, for example, during the ready-to-reach effect of decorative symbols. Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, the first timer image display of FIG. 75(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, moves to the left, and is connected to a predetermined position (first position) on the right side of the first button image BI1. The first timer image TN1 at the first position is adjacent to the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of a countdown type. Next, the timer image movement effect shown in FIG. 75(C) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to a predetermined position (second position) below the first button image BI1. Further, a light emitting effect is performed in which the first button image BI1 emits light in a predetermined color, and after the start of this light emitting effect, a second timer image TN2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type.

Next, the second timer image display effect shown in FIG. 75(D) is executed. Specifically, the second timer image TN2 appearing from the right side of the display screen 7a moves to the left and is connected to the first position on the right side of the first button image BI1. The position where the second timer image TN2 is connected is the same as the position where the first timer image TN1 was originally connected. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed at the second position below the first button image BI1, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the first position on the right side of the first button image BI1. The first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed at positions adjacent to each other, and are each adjacent to the first button image BI1.

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 75(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are connected (adjacent) to the first button image BI1, a character image of "Press!" is displayed to prompt the player to operate the production button 63. (Button operation promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position, as shown in FIG. 75(F). After that, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed as losing symbols.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer image movement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, a first effect in which the first timer image TN1 is displayed while the first button image BI1 is displayed on the display screen 7a; After the first effect, a second effect in which the first timer image TN1 is displayed at another position on the display screen 7a, and the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the position where the first timer image TN1 was displayed. and is configured to be executable. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73(B), FIG. 74(B), and FIG. 75(B), the first timer image TN1 when the first timer image is displayed is the first button image BI1. Adjacent to. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73(D), 74(D), and 75(D), the first timer image TN1 when displaying the second timer image is replaced with the second timer image TN2. It is adjacent to. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73(D), 74(D), and 75(D), the first timer image TN1 when displaying the second timer image is the first button image BI1. Adjacent to. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73(C), 74(C), and 75(C), before the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the first position, the first A light emitting effect of the button image BI1 is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, the first button image BI1 has a shape representing the appearance of the operation section (here, the production button 63) of the gaming machine 1. There is. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the timer image movement effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, the first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the effect button 63 and the two timer images TN1 and TN2 are configured to be able to perform effects. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect using an image having an external shape of the operation section that is different from the effect button 63 instead of the first button image BI1. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect using a specific image having a shape other than the appearance of the operation section instead of the first button image BI1. The specific image is an image including arbitrary characters, figures, symbols, etc., such as character images. In other words, the first button image BI1 may be any image other than the button image. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modification 2]
Although the timer of the timer image TN in FIGS. 73 to 75 is of a countdown type, it may be of a count-up type. Further, the timer image TN does not need to be adjacent to the button image BB.

[Modification 3]
The display contents of the timer image movement effects A to C shown in FIGS. 73 to 75 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. Furthermore, the timer image movement effects A to C may not include some of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 73 to 75, or may include other effect contents. Further, the timer image movement effects A to C are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 73 to 75 with respect to the positions and movement directions of the operation unit image, decorative pattern, and hold icon, and may be any position or movement direction.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first timer image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second timer image,
a first effect in which the first timer image is displayed in a first position while the first image is displayed on the display means; and after the first effect, the first timer image is A gaming machine capable of executing a second effect in which an image is displayed at a second position and the second timer image is displayed at the first position.
[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
In the first performance, the first timer image at the first position is adjacent to the first image. The gaming machine.
[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or aspect C1-2,
In the second effect, the first timer image at the second position is adjacent to the first image. The gaming machine.
[Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
In the second effect, the first timer image at the second position is adjacent to the second timer image at the first position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second performance, a predetermined performance using the first image is performed before the second timer image is displayed at the first position.
[Aspect C1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-5 further includes:
Equipped with operating means that can be operated by the operator,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first image is an image representing an external appearance of the operating means.

The timer image tilt display effect will be explained using FIGS. 76 to 78. This timer image tilt display effect can be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols, a reach effect (super reach effect), or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the timer image tilt display effect, reads out the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it. This is a display effect displayed on the screen 7a.

[Timer image tilt display effect A]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining timer image tilt display effect A. In timer image tilt display effect A, first, the first timer image display of FIG. 76(A) is executed. This first timer image display is executed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols. Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a first timer image TN1 is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a, and a fan-shaped area image SC is displayed over the entire display screen 7a. The area image SC has a different color from other parts of the display screen 7a. The first timer image TN1 is displayed at a predetermined lower right position (first position) on the area image SC. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of a countdown type.

Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 76(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to the upper left along the fan-shaped area image SC, and is displayed diagonally compared to when it was displayed at the first position. Next, the second timer image display shown in FIG. 76(C) is executed. Specifically, after the first timer image TN1 moves to the upper left from the first position on the area image SC, the second timer image TN2 is displayed at the first position on the area image SC at a predetermined timing. be done. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type. The first timer image TN1 continues to move along the area image SC and is displayed tilted by approximately 90 degrees compared to when it was displayed at the first position.

Next, the second timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 76(D) is executed. Specifically, like the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 moves to the upper left along the area image SC and is displayed diagonally compared to when it was displayed at the first position. At this time, the first timer image TN1 moves to the lower left along the area image SC and is displayed tilted by about 90 degrees or more compared to when it was displayed at the first position. Further, the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emission effect or an enlarged effect when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds).

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 76(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the area image SC, a character image of "Press!" (button operation) is displayed to prompt the player to operate the production button 63. Promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operational validity period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position, as shown in FIG. 76(F). After that, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed as losing symbols.

[Timer image tilt display effect B]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining timer image tilt display effect B. In timer image tilt display effect B, first, the first timer image display of FIG. 77(A) is executed. This first timer image display is executed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols, similarly to FIG. 76(A). Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. Further, a first timer image TN1 is displayed at a predetermined position (first position) near the center of the display screen 7a. The first timer image TN1 is located above the first button image BI1. The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of a countdown type.

Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 77(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 rotates to the left (counterclockwise rotation) at the first position. As a result, the first timer image TN1 is displayed diagonally compared to the state when it appears on the display screen 7a. Next, the second timer image display shown in FIG. 77(C) is executed. Specifically, after the first timer image TN1 is displayed, the second timer image TN2 is displayed at a second position near the center on the right side of the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type. The first timer image TN1 continues to rotate counterclockwise and is displayed tilted by approximately 90 degrees at the first position.

Next, the second timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 77(D) is executed. Specifically, like the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 rotates to the left (counterclockwise rotation) at the second position and is displayed diagonally compared to the state at the time it appears on the display screen 7a. be done. The first timer image TN1 continues to rotate counterclockwise and is displayed tilted by about 90 degrees or more compared to the state at the time it appears on the display screen 7a. Further, the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emission effect or an enlarged effect when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds).

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 77(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 are displayed on the area image SC, a character image of "Press!" (button operation) is displayed to prompt the player to operate the production button 63. Promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operational validity period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position, as shown in FIG. 77(F). After that, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed as losing symbols.

[Timer image tilt display effect C]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the timer image tilt display effect C. In the timer image tilt display effect C, first, the first timer image display of FIG. 78(A) is executed. This first timer image display is executed, for example, during the ready-to-win effect of decorative symbols, similarly to FIG. 76(A). Here, a first button image BI1 representing the appearance of the production button 63 (FIG. 1) is displayed near the lower center of the display screen 7a. Furthermore, a first timer image TN1 is displayed at a position adjacent to the right side of the first button image BI1 (first position). The timer of the first timer image TN1 is of a countdown type.

Next, the first timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 78(B) is executed. Specifically, the first timer image TN1 moves to the upper left along the first button image BI1, and is displayed diagonally compared to when it was displayed at the first position. The first timer image TN1 is in contact with the first button image BI1 even during movement. Next, the second timer image display shown in FIG. 78(C) is executed. Specifically, after the first timer image TN1 moves from the first position to the upper left along the first button image BI1, at a predetermined timing, the first timer image TN1 moves to the first position adjacent to the right side of the first button image BI1. The second timer image TN2 is displayed. The timer of the second timer image TN2 is of a countdown type. The first timer image TN1 continues to move along the first button image BI1 and is displayed tilted by approximately 90 degrees compared to when it was displayed at the first position.

Next, the second timer image tilt display shown in FIG. 78(D) is executed. Specifically, like the first timer image TN1, the second timer image TN2 moves to the upper left along the first button image BI1, and is displayed diagonally compared to when it was displayed at the first position. Ru. At this time, the first timer image TN1 moves to the lower left along the first button image BI1, and is displayed tilted by about 90 degrees or more compared to when it was displayed at the first position. Further, the first timer image TN1 executes a predetermined effect such as a light emission effect or an enlarged effect when the timer value becomes smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 4 seconds).

When the timer value of the first timer image TN1 becomes zero (for example, "0:00"), the button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 78(E) is executed. Specifically, in a state where the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 that have touched the first button image BI1 are displayed, a character image of "Press!" is displayed to prompt the player to operate the production button 63. (Button operation promotion image) OPI and a timer bar TBI indicating the operation validity period of the effect button 63 are displayed. When the player operates the effect button 63, the first button image BI1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the explosion image EXI is displayed at the same position, as shown in FIG. 78(F). After that, the performance symbols are stopped and displayed as losing symbols.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer image tilt display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76(B), 77(B), and 78(B), the first button image BI1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the first timer It is configured to be able to execute a first effect in which the image TN1 is displayed tilted at a predetermined angle with respect to the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, in the first effect, the first timer image TN1 is adjacent to the first button image BI1. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the first effect shown in FIG. 76(B), FIG. 77(B), and FIG. 78(B), FIG. As shown in C), it is configured to be able to execute a second performance in which the first timer image TN1 is displayed tilted at a different angle from that during the first performance. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, the first button image BI1 has a shape representing the appearance of the operation section (here, the production button 63) of the gaming machine 1. There is. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 77(D)(E) and 78(D)(E), when the countdown value displayed on the first timer image TN1 reaches a predetermined value Furthermore, the third effect in which the size of the first timer image TN1 changes can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the timer image tilt display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, a first button image BI1 showing the appearance of the effect button 63 and two timer images TN1 and TN2 are configured to be able to perform effects. However, the gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect using an image having an external appearance of the operation section that is different from the effect button 63 instead of the first button image BI1. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may perform a similar effect using a specific image having a shape other than the appearance of the operation section instead of the first button image BI1. The specific image is an image including arbitrary characters, figures, symbols, etc., such as character images. In other words, the first button image BI1 may be any image other than the button image. With this configuration as well, it is possible to impress the player with an innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modification 2]
Although the timer of the timer image TN in FIGS. 76 to 78 is of a countdown type, it may be of a count-up type. Furthermore, the timer image TN in FIGS. 76 to 78 may or may not be adjacent to the button image BI1. Further, the first timer image TN1 and the second timer image TN2 in FIGS. 76 to 78 may or may not be adjacent to each other.

[Modification 3]
The display contents of the timer image tilt display effects A to C shown in FIGS. 76 to 78 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. Furthermore, the timer image tilt display effects A to C may not include some of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, or may include other effect contents. Further, the timer image tilt display effects A to C are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 76 to 78 with respect to the positions and moving directions of the operation unit images, decorative patterns, and hold icons, and may be at arbitrary positions and moving directions.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
One of the plurality of types of images is a timer image,
A game characterized in that, in a state where the first image is displayed on the display means, a first effect can be executed in which the timer image is displayed tilted at a predetermined angle with respect to the first image. Machine.
[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
In the first performance, the timer image is adjacent to the first image.
[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or aspect C2-2,
A gaming machine characterized in that, after the first performance, a second performance can be executed in which the timer image is displayed tilted at a different angle from that during the first performance.
[Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3 further includes:
Equipped with operating means that can be operated by the operator,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first image is an image representing an external appearance of the operating means.
[Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4,
A gaming machine capable of executing a third effect in which the size of the timer image changes when the countdown value displayed on the timer image reaches a predetermined value.

The timer button effect will be explained below using FIGS. 79 to 80. This timer button performance can be executed during a fluctuating performance of decorative symbols (during one fluctuating performance) (for example, during a reach performance (super reach performance)), or during a jackpot game.

[Timer button effect A]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining timer button effect A.
In timer button effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a first button display effect is executed. In this first button display effect, button image C3A is displayed. The button image C3A is an image that suggests the performance button 63, and has a hunch that a performance using the performance button 63 may be performed from now on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image C3B and a button image C3A are displayed. The timer image C3B is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image C3B shown in FIG. 79(B), "50 seconds" is shown as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(C), a second button display effect is executed. In this second button display effect, a button image C3C and a timer image C3B are displayed. The button image C3C is an image for prompting the player to operate the production button 63, and in other words, it is an image indicating that the production button 63 is in a valid operation period. Specifically, the button image C3C is an image in which "PUSH" is expressed in the image, a state in which the color of the button image C3A is darkened, and/or a state in which the button image C3A appears to be lit. It is. Further, adjacent to the button image C3C, the words "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the performance button 63. In the timer image C3B, a timer value of "0 seconds" is shown. The button image C3C is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C3B reaches "0 seconds". The present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed after the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before reaching "0 seconds". Note that the effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C3C returns to the state of the button image C3A after the valid operation period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(D), in response to the player pressing the effect button 63, an accessory movable effect is executed. This accessory movable performance is a performance in which the board movable body 15 is movably controlled to the unfolded position and placed on the display screen 7a (a position that hides the display screen 7a). This moving performance of the role functions as an opportunity booster.

[Timer button performance B]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining timer button effect B.
In timer button effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 80(A), a first button display effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 79(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(B), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image C3D and a button image C3A are displayed. The timer image C3D is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, and is arranged within the button image C3A. In the timer image C3D shown in FIG. 80(B), "30 seconds" is shown as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(C), a second button display effect is executed. In this second button display effect, a button image C3C and a timer image C3D are displayed. In the timer image C3D, a timer value "0 seconds" is shown in the button image C3C. The button image C3C is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C3D reaches "0 seconds". The present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed after the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before reaching "0 seconds". Note that the effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C3C returns to the state of the button image C3A after the valid operation period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(D), a re-timer display effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63. In this re-timer display effect, the timer display is performed again, that is, the timer image C3D and button image C3A are displayed. In this case, similar to FIG. 80(B), the timer image C3D is arranged within the button image C3A. Note that in the timer image C3D shown in FIG. 80(D), "50 seconds" is shown as the timer initial value, which is longer than in the case of FIG. 80(B). Thereby, it is possible to suggest that the re-timer display effect has a high expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, in the timer display effects in the timer button effects A and B, a plurality of patterns are prepared for the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D. For example, as the timer initial values of timer images C3B and C3D, the first pattern is set to 50 seconds and 30 seconds, respectively, as shown in FIG. 79 and FIG. They are set to long 70 seconds and 50 seconds, respectively. In this case, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the second pattern is set as the timer initial value of the timer images C3B and C3D than when the first pattern is set. When the first pattern is displayed as the timer initial value of the timer images C3B and C3D, and when the second pattern is displayed as the timer initial value, it functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer button effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, in the timer button effects A and B, when the button image C3A is displayed, the timer image is displayed, and after the timer image is displayed. In response to the timer value of the timer image reaching a predetermined value (0 seconds), a button image C3C prompting the player to press the production button 63 is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the change in the button image from the timer display, and can prevent the player from missing the timing to press the effect button 63. Therefore, it is possible to improve the participation rate of the players in the game performance, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer button effects A and B are executed during one variable effect. According to this configuration, the timer value shifts from the initial value (50 seconds or 30 seconds) to the predetermined value (0 seconds) during one fluctuating performance, so the player can check the change in the button image from the timer display without making any mistakes. This can be recognized, and it is possible to prevent the timing of pressing the effect button 63 from being missed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the participation rate of the players in the game performance, and as a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, in the timer button effect B, when the button image C3A is displayed, the timer image C3D is displayed, and after the timer image C3D is displayed, the timer image C3D is displayed. In response to the timer value of C3D reaching a predetermined value (0 seconds), a button image C3C prompting the player to press the production button 63 is displayed, and in response to the player pressing the production button 63, A re-timer display effect is executed in which the timer image C3D and button image C3A are displayed again. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the change in the button image from the timer display, can prevent the player from missing the timing to press the production button 63, and can display the timer again after pressing the production button 63. Since this is executed, it is possible to give a surprise to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's desire to play while increasing the player's participation rate in the game performance. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, in the timer button effect B, the timer image C3D is displayed within the button image C3A. According to this configuration, the timer display allows the player to have a strong sense of the performance related to the performance button 63 (button press performance, etc.), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer button effects A and B, the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern, Each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display). According to this configuration, since it is possible to create a chance-up effect using the initial value of the timer, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer button effects A and B, the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern, Each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set. . According to this configuration, it is possible to create a chance-up effect using the timer initial value, and the player can also look forward to the appearance of the second pattern as the timer initial value. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the timer button presentation is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, in the timer button effects A and B, the button image C3C is displayed in the second button effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. In response to the press, a moving accessory effect and a re-timer display effect are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the button image C3C is displayed in the second button performance but the performance button 63 is not pressed by the player, the role object movement performance or the re-timer display performance may not be executed. Good too.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer button performances A and B are executed during one variable performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer button performances A and B may be executed across multiple variable effects.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer button effects shown in FIGS. may be displayed simultaneously.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer images C3B and C3D are displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed in a count-up manner in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when the predetermined value is reached, the above-described timeout display effect may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer button effects A and B, the timer initial values of the timer images C3B and C3D may be displayed in the first pattern or in the second pattern, Each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in timer button effects A and B, when the timer initial values of timer images C3B and C3D are displayed, there is a case where the timer images are displayed in a first color (for example, blue), and a case where the timer images are displayed in a second color (for example, blue). For example, the color may be displayed in gold (for example, gold), and each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the second color is displayed better than the first color. However, the configuration may be such that the expectation of a jackpot is high.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 79 to 80, in the timer button effects A and B, the button image C3C is displayed in the second button effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. In response to the press, a moving accessory effect and a re-timer display effect are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the second button performance, when the button image C3C is displayed and the player presses the performance button 63, a pseudo continuous performance, jackpot preview performance, reach development destination preview performance, jackpot expectation level, etc. Effects such as a suggestive effect, a pending change notice, or a look-ahead start notice may be executed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
A performance display means capable of executing multiple display performances;
an operation section that can be operated by the player;
A gaming machine comprising:
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays a first operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The second display performance is a performance that displays a first timer,
The third display performance is a performance that displays a second operation unit image that is an operation unit image representing the operation unit and prompts the player to operate the operation unit,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the second display performance is performed while the first display performance is being performed, and the timer value of the first timer display in the second display performance becomes a predetermined value. The third display effect may be performed depending on the situation.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C3-2]
Equipped with a symbol display means capable of performing a symbol fluctuation display that starts and then stops the fluctuating display of the symbol,
The combination performance may be performed during one display of the symbol variation,
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1.
[Aspect C3-3]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance that displays a second timer,
The combination performance is a performance that may include a fourth display performance,
In the combination performance, the third display performance is performed, and when the player operates the operation unit, the fourth display performance is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2.
[Aspect C3-4]
In the combination effect, the first timer display in the second display effect may be displayed in an area where the first operation unit image is displayed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3.
[Aspect C3-5]
The first timer display in the second display effect is one of a plurality of timer display modes including a first mode of timer display and a second mode of timer display. It is done,
In the second display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the first aspect, it functions as a first chance up display;
In the second display performance, when the first timer display is the timer display of the second aspect, it functions as a second chance up display with a higher jackpot expectation than the first chance up display;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4.
[Aspect C3-6]
In the first aspect of the first timer display, the initial value of the timer value is a first length;
The timer display of the second aspect of the first timer display is such that the initial value of the timer value is a second length longer than the first length.
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5.

The timer pseudo-continuation effect will be explained below using FIGS. 81 and 82. This timer pseudo-continuous performance can be executed during the fluctuating performance of the decorative symbols (during one fluctuating performance), for example, at the start of the variation of the decorative symbols, during the ready-to-win performance, and the like.

[Timer pseudo continuous performance A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining timer pseudo-continuous effect A.
In the timer pseudo continuous effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, timer image C4A is displayed. The timer image C4A is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image C4A shown in FIG. 81(A), "15 seconds" is shown as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), button press effect A is executed. In button press effect A, a button image C4B and a timer image C4A are displayed. The button image C4B is an image for prompting the player to operate the production button 63, in other words, it is an image indicating that the production button 63 is in the valid operation period. Specifically, the button image C4B is an image in which "PUSH" is expressed in the image, a state in which the color of the button image C4D is made darker, and/or a state in which the button image C4D appears to be lit. It is. Further, adjacent to the button image C4B, the words "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the performance button 63. In the timer image C4A, a timer value of "0 seconds" is shown. The button image C4B is displayed after the timer value of the timer image C4A reaches "0 seconds". The present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed after the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before reaching "0 seconds". Note that the effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image C4B disappears after the valid operation period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), pseudo-continuous effect A is executed. In the pseudo-coupling effect A, a pseudo-coupling suggestion image C4C is displayed. The pseudo-coupled suggestion image C4C is an image reminiscent of a pseudo-coupled effect, and specifically shows "Pseudo x 2" which suggests that the pseudo-coupled production is the second time. Further, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the logo pattern suggesting a pseudo-continuous performance. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the form of "7, logo pattern, 7".
After the pseudo continuous performance, a predetermined performance is executed. Various performances are performed as predetermined performances, such as a reach performance, a super reach performance, a chance-up performance (a performance that suggests jackpot expectation level), a jackpot notice performance, a reach development destination notice performance, a pending change notice, or a look-ahead start notice. obtain.
In addition, a pseudo-continuous performance is a performance that is executed at the start of a fluctuating change or a reach performance, etc., for example, a performance that repeats a performance in which decorative symbols start to fluctuate and temporarily stop, or a performance that repeats a performance in which decorative symbols start changing and temporarily stop, or when a predetermined pattern arrangement of decorative symbols is performed. Along with a display that repeatedly temporarily stops at least a part of the logo, a display that repeatedly temporarily stops a predetermined logo, or a display that suggests a pseudo series such as "x2", "x3", or "pseudo", Includes a performance that executes a fluctuating display of decorative patterns.

[Timer pseudo continuous performance B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining timer pseudo-continuous effect B.
In the timer pseudo continuous effect B, first, the timer button display effect A is executed as shown in FIG. 82(A). In this timer button display effect A, a timer image C4A and a button image C4D are displayed. The button image C4D is an image that suggests the performance button 63, and has a hunch that a performance using the performance button 63 may be executed from now on. The timer image C4A is similar to the timer image C4A in FIG. 81(A), in which the timer value is displayed in a countdown manner, and "15 seconds" is shown as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), button press effect A is executed similarly to FIG. 81(B).
Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), pseudo-continuous effect A is executed similarly to FIG. 81(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), timer button display effect B is executed. In the timer button display effect B, a timer image C4A and a button image C4D are displayed. Button image C4D is similar to button image C4D in FIG. 82(A). The timer image C4A shows "30 seconds" as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), button press effect B is executed similarly to FIG. 82(B).
Next, as shown in FIG. 82(F), pseudo-continuous effect B is executed. In the pseudo-coupling presentation B, a pseudo-coupling suggestion image C4E is displayed. The pseudo-coupling suggestion image C4E is an image reminiscent of a pseudo-coupling performance, and specifically shows "Pseudo x 3" which suggests that the pseudo-coupling production is the third time. Further, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the logo pattern suggesting a pseudo-continuous performance. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the form of "7, logo pattern, 7".
After the pseudo continuous effect B, a predetermined effect is executed. Various performances are performed as predetermined performances, such as a reach performance, a super reach performance, a chance-up performance (a performance that suggests jackpot expectation level), a jackpot notice performance, a reach development destination notice performance, a pending change notice, or a look-ahead start notice. obtain.

In addition, in the timer display effects in the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B, a plurality of patterns are prepared for the timer initial value of the timer image C4A. For example, as the timer initial value of timer image C4A, the first pattern is set to 15 seconds, as shown in FIG. 82, and the second pattern is set to 30 seconds, which is longer than the first pattern. In this case, in the timer display effect, when the second pattern is set as the timer initial value of the timer image C4A, the probability of obtaining the timer pseudo-continuous effect B is higher than when the first pattern is set. That is, the configuration is such that, after the pseudo-continuous performance, there is a high probability that the pseudo-continuous performance (see FIG. 82(F)) will be performed again. When the timer initial value of the timer image C4A is displayed in the first pattern and when it is displayed in the second pattern, it functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer pseudo-continuation effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the timer image C4A is displayed in the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B, and the timer value of the timer image C4A becomes a predetermined value (0 seconds). In response to this, a button image C4B prompting the player to press the performance button 63 is displayed, and in response to the player pressing the performance button 63, a pseudo continuous performance is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to create a sense of surprise more than simply executing a pseudo continuous performance, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, in the timer pseudo-continuous performance B, a button image C4D and a timer image C4A indicating that a button performance using the performance button 63 will be performed from now on are displayed, In response to the timer value of timer image C4A reaching a predetermined value (0 seconds), button image C4B prompting the player to press the production button 63 is displayed, and the player presses the production button 63. Pseudo-continuous performance is executed according to the following. According to this configuration, by displaying the button image C4D, execution of the pseudo continuous effect can be predicted, and it is possible to give a thrilling feeling to the progress of the game. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer pseudo-continuous performances A and B are executed during one variable performance. According to this configuration, since the timer value shifts from the initial value to the predetermined value (0 seconds) during one fluctuating performance, the player can recognize the change in the button image from the timer display without error, and It is possible to prevent the timing of pressing the button 63 from being missed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the participation rate of the players in the game performance, and as a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, in the timer pseudo continuous effect B, after the pseudo continuous effect A is executed, the timer button display effect is executed again (see FIG. 82(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a surprise to the player and also to give a sense of expectation that the pseudo continuous performance will be realized again, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B, there are cases in which the timer initial value of the timer image C4A is displayed in the first pattern and cases in which it is displayed in the second pattern. Each functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display). According to this configuration, it is possible to create a chance-up effect using the initial value of the timer, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B, there are cases in which the timer initial value of the timer image C4A is displayed in the first pattern and in cases in which it is displayed in the second pattern. function as a chance-up display (chance-up display), and the probability that the timer pseudo-continuous performance B will occur is higher when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set, that is, The configuration is such that after the pseudo-continuous performance, there is a high probability that the pseudo-continuous performance (see FIG. 82(F)) will be performed again. According to this configuration, it is possible to create a chance-up effect using the timer initial value, and the player can also look forward to the appearance of the second pattern as the timer initial value. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the timer pseudo-continuation effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, in the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B, the button image C4B is displayed in the button press effect, and the effect button 63 is pressed by the player. , a pseudo continuous effect is executed in response to the press, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the player does not press the effect button 63 even though the button image C4B is displayed in the button press effect, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer pseudo continuous effects A and B are executed during one variable effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. , B may be executed across multiple variable effects.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the timer image C4A is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image C4A may be displayed in a count-up manner in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when the predetermined value is reached, the above-described timeout display effect may be executed.

[Variation 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B, there are cases in which the timer initial value of the timer image C4A is displayed in the first pattern and in cases in which it is displayed in the second pattern. function as a chance-up display (chance-up display), and the probability that the timer pseudo-continuous performance B will occur is higher when the second pattern is set than when the first pattern is set, that is, Although the configuration is such that there is a high probability that the pseudo continuous effect (see FIG. 82(F)) will be performed again after the pseudo continuous effect, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in timer pseudo-coupling effects A and B, when the timer initial value of timer image C4A is displayed, there is a case where the timer image is displayed in a first color (for example, blue), and a case where the timer image is displayed in a first color (for example, blue), and a second color (for example, , gold), and each of these functions as a chance-up effect (chance-up display), and the second color is better than the first color. The configuration may be such that the probability of timer pseudo continuous performance B, that is, the probability that the pseudo continuous performance (see FIG. 82(F)) will be performed again after the pseudo continuous performance is high.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer pseudo-continuous effects A and B shown in FIGS. The above timer images may be displayed simultaneously.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C4-1]
A performance display means capable of performing multiple types of display performances;
an operation section that can be operated by the player;
A gaming machine comprising:
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays a first timer display,
The second display performance is a performance that displays a first operation unit image that is an operation unit image representing the operation unit and prompts the player to operate the operation unit,
The third display performance is a pseudo continuous performance,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and the second display effect is performed in response to a timer value of the first timer display in the first display effect reaching a predetermined value. , the third display performance may be performed in response to the player operating the operation unit;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect C4-2]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance that displays a second operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The combination performance is a performance that may include a fourth display performance,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the fourth display may be performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1, characterized in that:
[Aspect C4-3]
Equipped with a symbol display means capable of performing a symbol fluctuation display that starts and then stops the fluctuating display of the symbol,
The combination performance may be performed during one display of the symbol variation,
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1 or aspect C4-2.
[Aspect C4-4]
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display performance is a performance that displays a second timer,
The combination performance is a performance that may include a fifth display performance,
In the combination performance, the fifth display performance may be performed after the third display performance is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3.
[Aspect C4-5]
The first timer display in the first display effect is one of a plurality of timer display modes including a first mode of timer display and a second mode of timer display. It is done,
In the first display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the first aspect, it functions as a first chance up display;
In the first display effect, when the first timer display is the timer display of the second mode, the fifth display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed in the combination effect. functions as a second chance up display with a higher expectation level than the first chance up display;
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-4, characterized in that:
[Aspect C4-6]
In the first aspect of the first timer display, the initial value of the timer value is a first length;
The timer display according to the second aspect of the timer display has an initial value of the timer value having a second length that is longer than the first length.
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-5, characterized in that:

The pending change effect will be explained below using FIGS. 83 to 85. This pending change performance is performed in parallel with the variation performance of decorative symbols. Of course, this includes the execution of reach effects (super reach effects), etc.

[Pending change performance A]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the pending change effect A. The pending change effect A is executed as one of the prefetch effects. That is, it is executed as one aspect of the look-ahead effect patterns A and B described above. There are two aspects of the pending change performance A based on the look-ahead performance pattern.

First, in the pending change effect A, as shown in FIG. 83(A), a variation start effect is executed. In this variation start performance, the decorative pattern that is being varied is displayed in the upper left corner. Further, at the bottom of the screen, a pending image 9A and a pending digested image 9C are displayed.

As one aspect following the variation start effect, a change display effect (1) is executed as shown in FIG. 83(B). In the change display effect (1), an oval change image CG1 labeled "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), change movement effect (1) is executed. In the change movement effect (1), an effect is performed in which the change image CG1 is sucked into the pending image HGW, which is one of the pending images 9A. The held image HGW is displayed in white. This hold image HGW corresponds to the target hold of the look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), a pending change effect (1) is performed. In the hold change effect (1), the white hold image HGW changes to the blue hold image HGB similar to the change image CG1.

On the other hand, as another aspect following the variation start effect, a change display effect (2) is executed as shown in FIG. 83(E). In the change display effect (2), an oval change image CG2 labeled "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in change image CG2 is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), change movement effect (2) is executed. In the change movement effect (2), an effect is performed in which the change image CG2 is sucked into the pending image HGW, which is one of the pending images 9A. The held image HGW is displayed in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(G), a pending change effect (2) is performed. In the hold change effect (2), the white hold image HGW changes to the red hold image HGR similar to the change image CG2.

[Pending change performance B]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the pending change performance B. Pending change performance B is executed as one of the look-ahead performances. That is, it is executed as one aspect of the look-ahead effect patterns A and B described above.

First, in the pending change effect B, as shown in FIG. 84(A), a variation start effect is executed. In this variation start performance, the decorative pattern that is being varied is displayed in the upper left corner. Further, at the bottom of the screen, a pending image 9A and a pending digested image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), change display effect (1) is executed. In the change display effect (1), an oval change image CG1 labeled "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), change movement effect (1) is executed. In the change movement effect (1), an effect is performed in which the change image CG1 is sucked into the pending image HGW, which is one of the pending images 9A. The held image HGW is displayed in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), a pending change effect (1) is performed. In the hold change effect (1), the white hold image HGW changes to the blue hold image HGB similar to the change image CG1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), similarly to FIG. 84(B), a change display effect (1) in which a change image CG1 is displayed is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 84(F), the change movement effect (1) is executed in the same way as in FIG. 84(C), and the change image CG1 is sucked into the changed held image HGB from the held image HGW. will be held.
Next, as shown in FIG. 84(G), a pending change effect (2) is performed. In the hold change effect (2), the blue hold image HGB changes to the red hold image HGR.

[Pending change performance C]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the pending change effect C. The pending change effect C is executed as one of the prefetch effects. That is, it is executed as one aspect of the look-ahead effect patterns A and B described above.

First, in the pending change effect C, as shown in FIG. 85(A), a variation start effect is executed. In this variation start performance, the decorative pattern that is being varied is displayed in the upper left corner. Further, at the bottom of the screen, a pending image 9A and a pending digested image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a button press promotion effect is executed. In the button press promotion effect, a button image BB indicating the effect button 63 is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a text image TG saying "Continuously press!" is displayed together with the button image BB. This prompts the player to hit the performance button 63 repeatedly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), change display effect (1) is executed. In the change display effect (1), an oval change image CG1 labeled "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in the change image CG1 is blue. At this time, a button press promotion performance is also performed in parallel.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), change display effect (2) is executed. In the change display effect (2), an oval change image CG2 labeled "Change" is displayed. At this time, the character background color in change image CG2 is red. At this time, a button press promotion performance is also performed in parallel.

That is, when the player repeatedly presses the performance button 63 by executing the button press promotion performance, the blue change image CG1 is displayed first, and then the red change image CG2 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(E), change movement effect (2) is executed. In the change movement effect (2), an effect is performed in which the change image CG2 is sucked into the pending image HGW, which is one of the pending images 9A. The held image HGW is displayed in white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), a pending change effect (2) is performed. In the hold change effect (2), the white hold image HGW changes to the red hold image HGR similar to the change image CG2.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects in this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, an oval change image labeled "Change" is displayed as a change display effect. The pending image HGW is changed in correspondence with this change image. According to this configuration, the change image can make the user expect a change in the reserved image, thereby increasing interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 83(B), the white pending image HGW is displayed as shown in FIG. 83(C) and FIG. 83(D). is changed to a blue pending image HGB. Furthermore, when the red change image CG2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 83(E), the white held image HGW changes to the red held image HGR as shown in FIGS. 83(F) and 83(G). be changed. According to this configuration, the displayed change images CG1 and CG2 can make the user expect a change to the reserved images HGB and HGR, and can improve interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 84(B), the white pending image HGW is displayed as shown in FIG. 84(C) and FIG. 84(D). is changed to a blue pending image HGB. Furthermore, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed again as shown in FIG. 84(E), the blue pending image HGB changes to the red pending image HGR as shown in FIG. 84(F) and FIG. 84(G). can be changed to According to this configuration, by displaying the change image CG1 again, the user can expect a change to the reserved image HGR, and it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, change movement effects are performed as shown in FIGS. 83(C), (F), FIGS. 84(C), (F), and FIG. 85(E). In the change movement effect, a change image is sucked into a hold image that is one of the hold images 9A, and the hold image is changed. According to this configuration, it is possible to produce changes in the reserved images, and it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a button press promotion effect is executed to urge the player to repeatedly press the effect button 63. Then, when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 85(C) and 85(D). According to this configuration, since the change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed by operating the effect button 63, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modified example]
Modifications of this embodiment will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, an oval change image labeled "Change" is displayed as a change display effect. The pending image HGW is changed in correspondence with this change image. Although the blue change image CG1 and the red change image CG2 are taken as examples here, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there may be three or more types of change images.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the blue change image CG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 83(B), it changes to the blue pending image HGB, and as shown in FIG. 83(E), the red change image CG1 is displayed. When CG2 is displayed, it changes to a red pending image HGR. In other words, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the change image and the changed pending image. On the other hand, two or more types of change images may correspond to one pending image, or one change image may correspond to two or more types of pending images.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a button press promotion effect is executed to urge the player to repeatedly press the effect button 63. Then, when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 85(C) and 85(D). On the other hand, the change display effects shown in FIGS. 85(C) and 85(D) may be performed without operating the effect button 63.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a button press promotion effect is executed to urge the player to repeatedly press the effect button 63. Then, when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 85(C) and 85(D). On the other hand, when the effect button 63 is not operated, the change display effects shown in FIGS. 85(C) and 85(D) are not performed, and the display shown in FIG. 85(F) follows from FIG. 85(B). It is also possible to perform a pending change effect as shown.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a button press promotion effect is executed to urge the player to repeatedly press the effect button 63. Then, when the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63, change images CG1 and CG2 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 85(C) and 85(D). As another aspect of this, the effect may be such that when the effect button 63 is repeatedly pressed, the effect does not shift to the change display effect (2) as shown in FIG. 85(D). In this case, it is conceivable to perform the change movement effect (1) and the pending change effect (1) in the same way as shown in FIGS. 83(C) and 83(D).

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C5-1]
a display means capable of informing the number of pending images by the number of displayed pending images;
A gaming machine equipped with a performance means capable of executing multiple performances,
The presentation means is capable of displaying a plurality of change preview images that foretell changes in the pending image,
A gaming machine characterized in that the suspended image is changed in correspondence with the plurality of change preview images.

[Aspect C5-2]
When a first change notice image is displayed for one of the held images, the held image is changed to the first hold image, and when a second change notice image is displayed, the held image is changed. A game machine characterized in that the image is changed to a second reserved image.

[Aspect C5-3]
When a first change notice image is displayed for one of the held images, the said hold image is changed to the first hold image, and when the first change notice image is displayed again, the said hold image is changed to the first change notice image. A gaming machine characterized by changing an image into a second reserved image.

[Aspect C5-4]
A gaming machine characterized in that the displayed change preview image acts on one of the suspended images, and then changes the suspended image.

[Aspect C5-5]
It further includes operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine, wherein the plurality of change preview images are displayed after the operation means is operated.

The acquired pitch display effect will be explained using FIG. 86. This acquired pitch display performance may be executed during a special game such as a jackpot game. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 receives a round designation command from the sub-control board 90 and can be displayed as one of the round game effects executed.

[Number of balls acquired display effect]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the acquired pitch display effect. In the acquired pitch display performance, first, the winning image display shown in FIG. 86(A) is executed. This winning image display is, for example, the second ball that entered the first grand prize opening 30 in the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 in which the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)) becomes "Long Open". This is executed when at least a portion of the subsequent game ball passes through the V area 39. Here, a V winning image WP indicating that the game ball has passed through the V area 39 is displayed. Since the V-winning image WP is an image that suggests that a highly accurate time saving state will occur later, it can be said that it is an image that suggests that a gaming state that is advantageous to the player will occur later. Note that in FIG. 86(A), the character image CRA1 is displayed while the V winning image WP is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(B), the current number of pitches obtainable CGN is displayed. The number of balls that can be acquired this time is a guideline for the number of balls that can be acquired in one round game. Here, at the start of the next round after the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71, the current number of balls obtainable CGN is displayed as a guide for the number of balls obtainable in the round game. Note that in FIG. 86(B), a plurality of right-handed hitting images RD1 and RD2 and a character image CRA1 are displayed with the currently obtainable pitch count display CGN being displayed. The right-handed images RD1 and RD2 are images that suggest firing the game ball to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(C), the current number of pitches acquired AAN is displayed. The currently acquired number of balls is the number of balls already acquired in the winning game. Here, at the start of the round, the number of balls acquired from the first round of the jackpot game to before the start of the round game is displayed as the currently acquired ball number display AAN. In addition, in FIG. 86(C), a plurality of right-handed hitting images RD1 and RD2 and a character image CRA1 are displayed with the currently acquired pitch count display AAN being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(D), the current number of pitches acquired AAN and the planned cumulative number of pitches acquired TPN are displayed. The planned cumulative number of pitches acquired is the number of pitches scheduled to be acquired at the end of the current round. Here, during the round game from the start of the round, the planned cumulative number of acquired balls display TPN is displayed adjacent to the currently acquired number of pitches display AAN. In addition, in FIG. 86(D), the planned cumulative number of acquired pitches display TPN and the currently acquired number of pitches display AAN are displayed vertically adjacent to each other, and a plurality of character images CRA1 and CRA2 are also displayed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of displaying the number of pitches acquired is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86(C), the current number of acquired pitches AAN is displayed with a plurality of right-handed hitting images RD1 and RD2 being displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of exhilaration from knowing the number of pitches he has already obtained in a jackpot game, and a feeling of expectation that he can obtain more balls by displaying the right-handed hit, thereby increasing his interest. can be achieved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86(D), the planned cumulative number of balls to be acquired TPN is displayed adjacent to the current number of balls to be acquired AAN during a round game. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of exhilaration as the current number of balls acquired approaches the planned cumulative number of balls acquired, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86(B), the current number of balls obtainable CGN is displayed at the start of a round game. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of elation by knowing the number of balls that can be acquired in the current round, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the V winning image WP shown in FIG. 86(A) is displayed before the currently obtainable ball count display CGN shown in FIG. 86(B) is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player by suggesting that the situation will be advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86(B), a plurality of right-handed hitting images RD1 and RD2 are displayed together with the current pitch count display CGN. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide both a sense of exhilaration from knowing the number of pitches that can be acquired in the current round, and a sense of expectation that this will be realized by hitting to the right by displaying the right-handed hit, thereby improving interest. be able to.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the acquired pitch count display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 86(A), an effect is shown in which a V winning image is exemplified as an image suggesting that a gaming state will be advantageous to the player later. However, instead of the V-winning image, the gaming machine 1 may perform the same effect using an image other than the V-winning image that suggests a gaming state that will be advantageous to the player later. Examples of images other than the V-winning image that suggest that a gaming state will later become advantageous to the player include an image that suggests that a jackpot game is about to start, an image that suggests that a small win game is about to start, etc. It is.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(B) and 86(C), two right-handed images are displayed. However, the gaming machine 1 may display three or more right-handed images. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may display a plurality of right-handed images having different sizes. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may display a plurality of right-handed game images RD1 and RD2 in FIG. 86(D).

[Modification 3]
The acquired ball count display performance may be performed in special games other than jackpot games. For example, it may be executed during a small winning game.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image that suggests firing the game ball in a predetermined direction,
In a state where a plurality of the first images are displayed during a winning game, a first effect can be executed in which a currently acquired number of balls representing the number of balls already acquired in the winning game is displayed. A gaming machine that does.
[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
A second effect can be executed during a round game, adjacent to the display of the currently acquired number of balls, to display a planned cumulative number of acquired balls representing the number of balls scheduled to be acquired at the end of the current round. A gaming machine.
[Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2,
A gaming machine characterized in that, at the start of a round game, it is possible to execute a third performance in which the number of balls that can be acquired this time representing the number of balls that can be acquired in the current round is displayed.
[Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image that suggests a gaming state that will be advantageous to the player later;
A gaming machine characterized in that, before the third performance is executed, a fourth performance in which the second image is displayed on the display means can be executed.
[Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3 or aspect D1-4,
In the third performance, the first image is displayed together with the display of the number of pitches that can be obtained this time.

The payout display effect will be explained using FIGS. 87 to 88. This payout display performance can be executed during a variation performance of decorative symbols during a probability change state or a time saving state (for example, at the end of a ready-to-win performance (before the start of a jackpot game)), or during a jackpot game.

[Payout display effect A]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining payout display effect A.
In payout display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 87(A), a payout schedule display effect is executed. This payout schedule display performance is performed after announcing a jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as the jackpot), before the start of a jackpot game based on the jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as the jackpot game), or during the jackpot game, and the payout is A projected ball number suggestion image D2A is displayed. The scheduled payout number suggestion image D2A is an image that suggests the number of balls scheduled to be paid out in the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as the scheduled payout number). The scheduled payout number suggestion image D2A of FIG. 87(A) shows that 800 balls are scheduled to be paid out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(B), a cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed. This cumulative payout schedule display performance is executed before or during the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout schedule ball number suggestion image D2B is displayed. The image D2B that suggests the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is a jackpot that was won before the relevant jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as a past jackpot during a consecutive run) among consecutive jackpots during the time saving state (hereinafter also referred to as a jackpot during a continuous run). This is an image that suggests the number of balls that is the sum of the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game based on the number of balls paid out during the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as the cumulative number of balls scheduled to be paid out). In other words, the cumulative number of balls scheduled to be paid out suggestion image D2B suggests the number of balls scheduled to be paid out in a jackpot game based on a jackpot in a series of games.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(C), a cumulative payout additional display effect is executed. In this cumulative payout additional display performance, an image D2B suggesting the cumulative number of balls to be paid out and an image D2C suggesting the cumulative number of balls to be paid out are displayed. The cumulative paid-out ball number suggestion image D2C is the number of balls paid out during a jackpot game based on past jackpots during consecutive games, plus the number of balls paid out, which is the number of balls already paid out during the jackpot game. This is an image that suggests the number (hereinafter also referred to as the cumulative number of paid out balls). In other words, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out suggestion image D2C suggests the number of balls that have already been paid out in the jackpot game based on the jackpot in consecutive games. In FIG. 87(C), the cumulative number of balls to be paid out suggestion image D2B is arranged below the cumulative number of balls to be paid out suggestion image D2C, and between the cumulative number of balls to be paid out suggestion image D2B and the cumulative number of balls to be paid out suggestion image D2C. A slash (line) is shown. That is, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out suggestion image D2B is placed at the denominator position, and the cumulative number of balls to be paid out suggestion image D2C is placed at the numerator position, and they are expressed in the form of "cumulative number of balls to be paid out/total number of balls scheduled to be paid out". .

This payout display performance A is executed in the case of a jackpot that shifts to a variable probability state with time savings, and is not executed in the case of a jackpot that shifts to a non-probability variable state with time savings. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout display performance A may be performed even when the jackpot does not shift to the non-probability variable state with time saving.

[Payout display effect B]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining payout display effect B.
In the payout display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 88(A), a payout schedule display effect is executed in the same manner as in FIG. 87.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(B), a cumulative payout schedule display effect is executed. This cumulative payout schedule display performance is executed before the start of the jackpot game or during the jackpot game, and displays the cumulative payout scheduled ball number suggestion image D2B, the jackpot payout ball number related image D2E, and the consecutive winning number suggestion. Image D2D is displayed. The payout ball number related image D2E indicates the number of balls already paid out in the jackpot game (hereinafter also referred to as the payout ball number) and the payout scheduled ball number. In FIG. 88(B), the display of the number of balls scheduled to be paid out is placed on the right side of the display of the number of balls scheduled to be paid out, and a slash ( line) is shown. That is, the display of the number of balls scheduled to be paid out is placed in the denominator position, and the display of the number of balls scheduled to be paid out is placed in the denominator position, and is expressed in the form of "number of balls scheduled to be paid out/number of balls scheduled to be paid out". The consecutive winning number suggestion image D2D is an image that suggests the number of consecutive winnings, that is, the number of consecutive winnings.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(C), a cumulative payout additional display effect is executed. This cumulative payout additional display performance is executed during the jackpot game, and a payout ball number-related image D2E, a consecutive winning number suggestion image D2D, and a cumulative payout ball number-related image D2F are displayed. The cumulative number of paid out balls related image D2F indicates the cumulative number of paid out balls and the cumulative number of scheduled paid out balls. In FIG. 88(C), the display of the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is placed to the right of the display of the cumulative number of balls to be paid out, and a slash ( line) is shown. That is, the display of the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is placed in the denominator position, and the display of the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is placed in the denominator position, and is expressed in the form of "cumulative number of balls to be paid out/cumulative number of balls scheduled to be paid out".

In addition, in payout display performances A and B, as mentioned above, the payout schedule display performance is executed at the end of the variable performance (reach performance) (before the start of the jackpot game) or during the jackpot game, and the payout schedule display performance is executed during the jackpot game. is executed at the end of the variable performance (reach performance) (before the start of the jackpot game) or during the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout additional display performance can be executed during the jackpot game. Therefore, for example, in the payout display performances A and B, the payout schedule display performance is executed before the start of the jackpot game, and the cumulative payout schedule display performance and the cumulative payout additional display performance are executed during the jackpot game.

This payout display performance B is executed in the case of a jackpot that shifts to a variable probability state with time savings, and is not executed in the case of a jackpot that shifts to a non-probability variable state with time savings. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the payout display performance B may be executed even in the case of a jackpot that does not shift to the non-probability variable state with time saving.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the payout display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, in the payout display effects A and B, the scheduled payout ball number suggestion image D2A is displayed in the payout schedule display effect, and the cumulative payout schedule display effect is Then, an image D2B indicating the cumulative number of balls scheduled to be paid out is displayed. According to this configuration, in addition to the number of balls scheduled to be paid out in the jackpot game, the player can grasp the cumulative number of balls scheduled to be paid out during the consecutive games, so the player's motivation to play can be improved. . As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, in the payout display effects A and B, when the cumulative payout scheduled number of balls is displayed in the cumulative payout additional display effect, the cumulative The number of paid balls is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play until the cumulative number of balls scheduled to be paid out is reached. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, when the cumulative payout scheduled number of balls is displayed in the cumulative payout schedule display performance or the cumulative payout additional display performance in the payout display performance B, The number of balls to be paid out is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can recognize the number of balls to be paid out, and can improve the player's desire to play until the cumulative number of balls scheduled to be paid out is reached. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, when the cumulative number of balls scheduled to be paid out is displayed in the payout display effect C, the number of consecutive games is suggested. According to this configuration, the average number of balls paid out in one jackpot game (average number of balls paid out) can be associated with the relationship between the cumulative number of balls scheduled to be paid out and the number of consecutive games, so if the average number of balls paid out is large, , the player can feel a sense of happiness, and when the average number of balls paid out is small, the player's motivation to play can be increased in order to extend the winning streak. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the payout display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 to 88, cumulative payout additional display effects are executed in payout display effects A and B, but the present invention is not limited to this. There may be cases where the cumulative payout additional display effect is not executed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, in the payout display performances A and B, a display indicating the cumulative number of balls scheduled to be paid out is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. isn't it. For example, if the gaming state after the jackpot is not a variable probability gaming state, the display indicating the cumulative number of balls scheduled to be paid out may not be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, the payout display performances A and B are executed in the order of the payout schedule display performance, the cumulative payout schedule display performance, and the cumulative payout additional display performance. , the present invention is not limited to this, and these orders may be changed. For example, the order may be the payout schedule display performance, the cumulative payout additional display performance, and the cumulative payout schedule display performance, or the order may be the cumulative payout schedule display performance, the payout schedule display performance, and the cumulative payout additional display performance.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, in the payout display performances A and B, the cumulative number of balls scheduled to be paid out is determined based on the jackpot during the consecutive games. is not limited to this. For example, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is set to the number of balls paid out during a jackpot game based on jackpots won before the jackpot (cumulative number of balls paid out on the day) among consecutive jackpots from the morning of that day. The number of balls added to the number of balls scheduled to be paid out (cumulative number of balls scheduled to be paid out on the day) may be used. In this case, the cumulative number of balls paid out on the day may also be displayed.
In addition, the cumulative number of balls to be paid out is set to the number of balls paid out during a jackpot game based on a jackpot won before the jackpot among consecutive jackpots from a certain timing (predetermined timing cumulative number of balls paid out). The number of balls added to the scheduled number of balls to be paid out (the cumulative number of balls scheduled to be paid out at a predetermined timing) may be used. In this case, the cumulative number of balls paid out at a predetermined timing may also be displayed. Note that the gaming machine 1 may have a function that allows the player to determine "a certain timing." This allows the player to arbitrarily set a "certain timing".

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D2-1]
A performance display means capable of executing multiple display performances;
A determining means for determining whether or not it is a jackpot by lottery;
A jackpot game execution means capable of executing a jackpot game that pays out game media to a player in the case of a jackpot;
A gaming machine comprising:
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays a payout schedule representing a scheduled payout number that is the number of game media scheduled to be paid out in a first jackpot game based on a first jackpot,
The first jackpot is a jackpot in a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The second display performance is performed during the first jackpot game, and the number of gaming media paid out during the second jackpot game based on the second jackpot is increased by the number of gaming media paid out during the second jackpot game based on the second jackpot game. This is a performance that displays a cumulative payout schedule that represents the cumulative payout schedule including the scheduled payout number.
The second jackpot is a jackpot won before the first jackpot among consecutive jackpots including the first jackpot during the second gaming state,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance and the second display performance are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect D2-2]
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display performance is performed during the first jackpot game, and the number of game media paid out during the second jackpot game is equal to the number of games that have already been paid out during the first jackpot game. It is a production that displays the cumulative payout indicating the cumulative payout number including the number of media,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the third display performance,
In the combination performance, when the second display performance is being performed, the third display performance may be performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1.
[Aspect D2-3]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance that is performed during the first jackpot game and displays a jackpot payout indicating the number of gaming media that has already been paid out during the first jackpot game,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the fourth display performance,
In the combination performance, when the second display performance is being performed, the fourth display performance may be performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or aspect D2-2.
[Aspect D2-4]
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display performance is a performance that is performed during the first jackpot game and displays the number of consecutive jackpots representing the number of consecutive jackpots,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the fifth display performance,
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is being performed, the fifth display effect is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-3.
[Aspect D2-5]
If the first jackpot is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the first jackpot game becomes a third gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the second gaming state, the combination performance is not executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4.

The winning image/character image superimposition effect will be explained using FIGS. 89 to 91. This winning image/character image superimposition effect may be executed during a special game such as a jackpot game. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 receives a round designation command from the sub-control board 90 and can be displayed as one of the round game effects executed.

[Winning image/character image superimposition effect A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining winning image/character image superimposition effect A. In the winning image/character image superimposition effect A, first, the winning image display of FIG. 89(A) is executed. This winning image display is, for example, the second ball that entered the first grand prize opening 30 in the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 that becomes "long open" in the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)). This is executed when at least a portion of the subsequent game ball passes through the V area 39. Here, a V winning image WP indicating that the game ball has passed through the V area 39 is displayed. Since the V winning image WP is an image that suggests that a highly accurate time-saving state will occur later, it can be said that it is an image that suggests that a gaming state that is advantageous to the player will occur later. In FIG. 89(A), the character image AN1 and the right-handed image RD1 are displayed while the V winning image WP is displayed. The first character image AN1 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves to the left. The right-handed image RD1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the V winning image WP. As mentioned above, in this specification, "images overlap" means that they appear to overlap from the player's perspective, and it does not matter whether they actually overlap or not. For example, if at least a portion of the V winning image WP displayed on the display screen 7a appears to be missing due to the first character image AN1, it can be said that the images overlap.

The first character image AN1 moves to the position of the V winning image WP, and the winning image/character image superimposed display shown in FIG. 89(B) is executed. Specifically, an image in which the first character image AN1 overlaps a part of the V winning image WP is displayed. In other words, an image is displayed in which the first character image AN1 is positioned in front of a portion of the V winning image WP. Even if the first character image AN1 is in an overlapping state, a part of the V winning image WP is displayed without being hidden. In FIG. 89(B), a second character image AN2 and a right-handed image RD1 are further displayed. The second character image AN2 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves to the left following the first character image AN1.

By moving both the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 to the left, the winning image/character image superimposed display shown in FIG. 89(C) is executed. Specifically, an image in which both the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 are overlapped on a part of the V winning image WP is displayed. In FIG. 89(C), a right-handed image RD1 is further displayed.

By further moving the first character image AN1 and the second character image AN2 to the left, the winning image/character image superimposed display shown in FIG. 89(D) is executed. Specifically, an image is displayed in which only the second character image AN2 overlaps a part of the V winning image WP. In other words, the V winning image WP with the first character image AN1 not overlapping is displayed. The first character image AN1 goes out of frame from the left end of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, the second character image AN2 further moves to the left, so that the winning image and the character image are in a non-superimposed state as shown in FIG. 89(E). Specifically, the V winning image WP in which the character images (first character image AN1 and second character image AN2) do not overlap is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89(F), the second character image AN2 goes out of frame from the left end of the display screen 7a.

[Winning image/character image superimposition effect B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining winning image/character image superimposition effect B.
Winning image/character image superimposition effect B differs from superposition effect A in FIG. 89 in that the shape of the V winning image WP changes. The V winning image WP of superimposed effect B changes its shape so as to represent a state in which a figure representing the three-dimensional shape of the Roman alphabet "V" is horizontally rotated. First, in FIG. 90(A), the character image AN1 and the right-handed image RD1 are displayed while the V winning image WP is displayed. The first character image AN1 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves to the left. The right-handed image RD1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the V winning image WP.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), the shape of the V-winning image WP changes compared to FIG. 90(A), and the first character image AN1 overlaps a part of the V-winning image WP. image is displayed. The V winning image WP has a shape in which the figure representing the three-dimensional shape is oriented laterally than in FIG. 90(A). Even if the first character image AN1 is in an overlapping state, a part of the V winning image WP is displayed. In FIG. 90(B), a second character image AN2 and a right-handed image RD1 are further displayed. The second character image AN2 appears from the right end of the display screen 7a and moves to the left following the first character image AN1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), while the shape of the V winning image WP changes compared to FIG. 90(B), the first character image AN1 and the second character An image in which both images AN2 are overlapped is displayed. In FIG. 90(C), a right-handed image RD1 is further displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), the shape of the V-winning image WP changes compared to FIG. 90(C), and only the second character image AN2 overlaps a part of the V-winning image WP. An image of the condition is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), the V-winning image WP is displayed with the shape of the V-winning image WP changing compared to FIG. 90(D), but with no overlapping character images. Thereafter, in FIG. 90(F), the shape of the V-winning image WP is changed compared to FIG. 90(E), and the V-winning image WP is displayed in a state where the character images are not overlapped.

[Winning image/character image superimposition effect C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the winning image/character image superimposition effect C.
Winning image/character image superimposition effect C differs from superposition effect B in FIG. 90 in the display method of character image AN1. The character image AN1 of the superimposed effect C does not move left and right on the display screen 7a to intersect with the V winning image WP, but its shape changes in accordance with the change in the shape of the V winning image WP. Specifically, the character image AN1 of the superimposed effect C is placed on one side of the three-dimensional shape of the V-winning image WP, and is horizontally rotated when the three-dimensional shape of the V-winning image WP is horizontally rotated. The shape changes to represent such a state. First, as shown in FIG. 91(A), an image in which the character image AN1 is superimposed on the V winning image WP is displayed. Specifically, an image showing a state in which the character image AN1 is located in a part of the front of the V winning image WP is displayed. Even if the first character image AN1 is in an overlapping state, a part of the V winning image WP is displayed. The right-handed image RD1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the V winning image WP.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the shapes of the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 change compared to FIG. 91(A). Specifically, an image is displayed in which the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V winning image WP and the character image AN1 is oriented laterally than in FIG. 91(A). Even in this state, the character image AN1 overlaps a part of the V winning image WP.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), an image is displayed in which the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V-winning image WP and the character image AN1 is oriented further laterally than in FIG. 91(B). Here, the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V-winning image WP and the character image AN1 faces right sideways, and the V-winning image WP is displayed with the character image AN1 not overlapping.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V-winning image WP and the character image AN1 is further horizontally rotated than in FIG. 91(C), and the three-dimensional shape of the V-winning image WP is An image is displayed in which the other side on which the character image AN1 is not placed is visible. The character image AN1 is hidden by the V winning image WP, and the V winning image WP with the character image AN1 not overlapping is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(E), the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V-winning image WP and the character image AN1 is further horizontally rotated than in FIG. 91(D), and the three-dimensional shape of the V-winning image WP is An image is displayed in which the other side on which the character image AN1 is not placed is the front side. Although a portion of the character image AN1 is visible between the V winning images WP, the V winning image WP is displayed with the character images AN1 not overlapping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91(F), the three-dimensional shape obtained by combining the V-winning image WP and the character image AN1 is further horizontally rotated than in FIG. 91(E), and again, the character image AN1 is The V-winning image WP is displayed in a state where it is not visible and the character image AN1 does not overlap.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the winning image/character image superimposition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89(B) to (D), FIGS. 90(B) to (D), and FIGS. An image with the character image superimposed on it is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 89(A)(E)(F), FIGS. 90(A)(E)(F), and FIGS. 91(C) to (F), V winnings with character images not overlapping Image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, since the player's attention can be directed to the display of the V winning image WP, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89(B) to (D), FIGS. 90(B) to (D), and FIGS. Even when an image with overlapping character images is displayed, another part of the V winning image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, even if a part of the V-winning image WP is overlapped with the character image, it is possible to show a part of the V-winning image WP to the player, so that the player can be informed that he or she has won a V-winning image. It can make people believe and improve their interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 89, FIG. 90(A), (B), (D) to (F), and FIG. An image in which a right-handed hit image overlaps a part of the image WP is displayed. According to this configuration, since the V winning image WP appears to be located at the back of the right-handed image, it is possible to create a sense of depth in the display and improve interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the shape of the V winning image WP changes to represent a rotating three-dimensional figure of the Roman alphabet "V". According to this configuration, since the V winning image WP appears to be located at the back of the right-handed image, it is possible to create a sense of depth in the display, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 to 91, effects are performed in which character images overlap and character images do not overlap with respect to the V winning image WP. According to this configuration, since the player's attention can be directed to the display of the V winning image WP, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the winning image/character image superimposition effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, even when the V winning image WP is covered with the character image, a part of the V winning image WP is visible. However, the entire V winning image WP may be covered with the character image, and the V winning image WP may become invisible.

[Modification 2]
The display contents of the winning image/character image superimposed effects A to C shown in FIGS. 89 to 91 may be displayed in an appropriate combination. Further, the winning image/character image superimposition effects A to C may not include part of the effect contents shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, or may include other effect contents. Furthermore, the winning image/character image superimposition effects A to C are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 89 to 91 with respect to the positions and moving directions of the operation unit images, decorative patterns, and hold icons, and may be at arbitrary positions and moving directions. .

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image that suggests a gaming state that will be advantageous to the player later;
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
A first display in which an image in which the second image overlaps at least a portion of the first image, and a display in which the first image in which the second image does not overlap are displayed. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing the following:
[Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first display, a portion of the first image is displayed without overlapping the second image.
[Aspect D3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third image suggesting right-handed hitting,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first display, an image in which the third image overlaps a part of the first image is displayed.
[Aspect D3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-3,
A game machine characterized in that the first image changes shape to represent a state in which a three-dimensional figure is rotating.
[Aspect D3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-3 or aspect D3-4,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first image is a V winning image.

The button image meter effect will be explained using FIGS. 92 and 93. This button image meter performance is executed during the fluctuation performance of the decorative symbols (during one fluctuation performance) (for example, at the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols, during the reach performance (super reach performance)), or during the jackpot game. can be done.

[Meter effect A in button image]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the button image meter effect A.
In button image meter effect A, first, a button meter display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 92(A). In this button meter display effect, a button image E1A and a meter image E1B are displayed. The button image E1A is an image that suggests the performance button 63, and has a hunch that a performance using the performance button 63 may be executed from now on. The meter image E1B is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) moves, and the meter value is expressed by the meter area moving. Further, the meter image E1B is arranged horizontally within the button image E1A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(B), a point awarding effect is executed. In this point award performance, a button image E1A, a meter image E1B, and a point acquisition image E1C are displayed. This point awarding performance may be executed multiple times. The point acquisition image E1C is an image that suggests that predetermined points have been awarded, in other words, that the player has acquired predetermined points. The point acquisition image E1C in FIG. 92(B) shows that three points (3P) have been awarded to the player (the player has acquired three points). Further, in the meter image E1B arranged within the button image E1A, it is shown that the meter area is enlarged by the points and the meter value has increased due to the points being given. The meter value of the meter image E1B increases each time a point awarding effect is executed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E1B represents the cumulative value of the acquired points. This point granting performance is a reach performance, a super reach performance, a chance-up performance (a performance that suggests jackpot expectation level), a jackpot notice performance, a reach development forecast notice performance, a pending change notice, a look-ahead performance, a performance that suggests pending expectation level, or a pseudo It can be started in response to the execution of various performances such as a series of performances.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92(C), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a button image E1A, a meter image E1B, and a chance-up image E1D are displayed. In the meter image E1B placed within the button image E1A, the meter area is enlarged and the meter value is shown to have reached the maximum (MAX).In addition, the chance-up image E1D is an image that suggests an increase in chances. Yes.The chance-up image E1D is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX).The chance-up image E1D in FIG. !'' and the words ``Expected level 50%'' indicating that the expected level of jackpot is about 50%.The chance-up image E1D is connected to the button image E1A on which the meter image E1B is arranged. displayed adjacent to each other.

[Meter effect B in button image]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the button image meter effect B.
In button image meter effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 93(A), a button meter display effect is executed similarly to FIG. 92(A).
Next, as shown in FIG. 93(B), a point awarding effect is performed in the same manner as in FIG. 92(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(C), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a button image E1A, a meter image E1B, and a timer image E1E are displayed. In the meter image E1B arranged within the button image E1A, the meter area is enlarged, and the meter value is shown to be the maximum (MAX). The timer image E1E is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the timer image E1E, a timer value is displayed in a countdown manner, and 50 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93(D), a button press effect is executed. In this button press effect, a button image E1F and a timer image E1E are displayed. The button image E1F is an image for prompting the player to operate the production button 63, and in other words, it is an image indicating that the production button 63 is in a valid operation period. Specifically, the button image E1F is displayed in the same size at the position where the button image E1A was, "PUSH" is expressed in the image, the button image E1A is darkened, and/or, This is an image showing a state as if the button image E1A is lit. Further, adjacent to the button image E1F, the words "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the production button 63. The timer image E1E shows that the timer value has become "0 seconds". The button image E1F is displayed after the timer value of the timer image E1E reaches "0 seconds". The present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed after the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before reaching "0 seconds". Note that the effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E1F disappears after the valid operation period has passed. Note that the meter image E1B may be displayed within the button image E1F. In this case, the meter value of the meter image E1B may indicate the maximum (MAX) or may return to the initial value (no meter area).

If the player presses the performance button 63 within the valid operation period due to the button press performance after the button press performance, a predetermined performance is executed. Various performances are performed as predetermined performances, such as a reach performance, a super reach performance, a chance-up performance (a performance that suggests jackpot expectation level), a jackpot notice performance, a reach development destination notice performance, a pending change notice, or a look-ahead start notice. obtain.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the button image meter effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the button image meter effects A and B, the meter image E1B is displayed when the button image E1A is displayed. This meter image E1B is arranged within the button image E1A. Then, after the meter image E1B is displayed, when the meter value of the meter image E1B reaches the maximum (MAX), a predetermined effect (such as a chance-up effect) is executed. According to this configuration, since the meter image E1B is arranged within the button image E1A, the player can associate the button performance using the performance button 63 with respect to the meter display. Therefore, when a button effect is actually performed in connection with the meter display, it is possible to give the player a high sense of expectation regarding the button effect, and other effects are performed instead of the button effect in relation to the meter display. If this is done, a sense of surprise can be given to the player. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the button image meter effects A and B, the point award effect is executed when the meter image E1B is placed within the button image E1A. Then, in the point awarding performance, the point acquisition image E1C is displayed, and when a predetermined point is awarded, the meter area in the meter image E1B is expanded by the number of points awarded, and a display in which the meter value has increased is executed. Ru. According to this configuration, since the meter value of the meter image arranged in the button image increases due to point assignment, it is possible to emphasize the increase in the meter value due to point acquisition. In addition, when the meter value of the meter image placed within the button image increases due to the point grant and reaches a predetermined value (maximum value), and the button effect develops using the effect button 63, the player will win a jackpot. It is possible to set high expectations for the future. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the button image meter effects A and B, the chance up image E1D or the timer image E1E is different from the button image E1A on which the meter image E1B is arranged. displayed adjacent to each other. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation for the development of the button performance using the performance button 63, and further, a feeling of expectation for a jackpot when the button performance develops. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, in the button image meter effect B, when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX) in the timer display effect, the timer image E1E is displayed. According to this configuration, when the timer value of the timer image E1E reaches a predetermined value, the player feels a sense of expectation for the development of button effects using the effect button 63, and furthermore, when the button effect develops, a jackpot is achieved. It can give a sense of expectation. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, in the button image meter effect B, when the timer value of the timer image E1E reaches "0 seconds" in the button press effect, the player is given an effect. A button image E1F prompting the user to press the button 63 is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of expectation for the development of the button effect using the effect button 63, and a stronger sense of expectation for a jackpot when the button effect develops. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the button image meter effects A and B, the chance up effect and the timer display effect are such that the meter value of the meter image E1B is the maximum (MAX). executed when According to this configuration, compared to the case where the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are executed when the meter value of the meter image E1B is a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX), the chance-up effect and the timer display effect are This can increase expectations for a jackpot if the game develops into a big hit. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the button image meter effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the button image meter effects A and B, the chance up image E1D or the timer image E1E is different from the button image E1A on which the meter image E1B is arranged. Although displayed adjacent to each other, the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance-up image E1D or the timer image E1E may be placed within the button image E1A, or may be placed at a predetermined distance from the meter image E1B. It may be displayed at a remote location.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the button image meter effects A and B, the meter value of the meter image E1B is configured to increase as points are awarded. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, during a button meter display performance, the meter value of the meter image E1B is a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area may be reduced and the meter value will drop as points are awarded in the point award performance. good. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), a chance-up effect shown in FIG. 92(C) or a timer display effect shown in FIG. 93(C) may be executed.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the button image meter effects A and B, the meter value of the meter image E1B is configured to increase as points are awarded. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of awarding points through a point awarding effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the meter area expands and the meter value increases when a predetermined action is performed. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 92(C) and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 93(C) are executed. In addition, "the predetermined action has been executed" means, for example, that a pseudo-sequence has been executed, that the hold icon has changed (a hold change display has been performed), or that a predetermined chance-up effect has been executed. This includes success in a certain challenge (game), etc.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in the button image meter effects A and B, in the chance up effect and the timer display effect, the meter value of the meter image E1B is the maximum value (MAX). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect may be executed not when the meter value of the meter image E1B is the maximum value (MAX) but when it reaches a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value or a quarter value of the meter value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be placed in the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the player can understand the predetermined value.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, after the chance up image E1D is displayed in the chance up effect in the button image meter effect A, the meter value of the button image E1A is set to the initial value (0). You may also change it back to . After that, a point awarding performance may be performed, and a performance that increases the meter value may be performed.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, in the button image meter effect B, the meter image E1B is not displayed in the button press effect. The meter image E1B may be displayed without limitation. In this case, the meter image E1B may be placed within the button image E1F. After that, a point awarding performance may be performed, and a performance that increases the meter value may be performed.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the meter effects A and B within the button image are executed during one fluctuating effect, but the present invention is not limited to this; for example, the meter effects within the button image Performances A and B may be executed across a plurality of variable performances.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, in the button image meter effect B, the timer image E1E is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down; however, the present invention is not limited to this. It's not something you can do. For example, the timer image E1E may be displayed in a count-up manner in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when the predetermined value is reached, the above-described button press effect may be executed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 93, one timer image is displayed in the meter effect B in the button image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to display two or more timer images. The timer images may be displayed simultaneously.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and an operation section operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays a first operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The second display effect is an effect that displays a predetermined meter and displays the meter in one of a plurality of modes,
The third display performance is a performance that displays the meter and performs a predetermined display when the meter is in a first mode of the plurality of modes,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed, and in the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, , the second display effect is performed, in the second display effect the meter is displayed within the first operation unit image of the first display effect, and after the second display effect, the A third display performance is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E1-2]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance in which predetermined points are awarded,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the fourth display performance,
In the combination performance, the fourth display performance is performed while the second display performance is being performed, and when the predetermined points are awarded in the fourth display performance, the fourth display performance is In the second display effect, a display is performed in which the meter is in a second mode to a third mode, which is different from the first mode.
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1.
[Aspect E1-3]
The predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a display that may be performed adjacent to the first operation unit image;
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-1 or aspect E1-2.
[Aspect E1-4]
The predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a timer display,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-3, characterized in that:
[Aspect E1-5]
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the fifth display performance,
In the combination performance, the fifth display performance is performed after the third display performance,
The fifth display effect is a second operation unit image that is an operation unit image representing the operation unit and prompts the player to operate the operation unit when the timer value of the timer display reaches a predetermined value. This is a performance that displays
The gaming machine according to aspect E1-4.
[Aspect E1-6]
In the third display effect, the time when the meter is in the first mode of the plurality of modes is when the value of the meter has reached the maximum value;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E1-1 to E1-5.

The button image display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95. This display effect in the button image is executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern (during one variation effect) (for example, at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, during the reach effect (super reach effect)), or during the jackpot game. can be done.

[Display effect A in button image]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining button image display effect A.
In button image meter effect A, first, a button meter display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 94(A). In this button meter display effect, a button image E2A and a meter image E2B are displayed. The button image E2A is an image that suggests the performance button 63, and has a hunch that a performance using the performance button 63 may be performed from now on. The meter image E2B is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) moves, and the meter value is expressed by the meter area moving. Further, the meter image E2B is arranged horizontally adjacent to the bottom of the button image E2A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(B), a point awarding effect is executed. In this point award performance, a button image E2A, a meter image E2B, and a point acquisition image E2C are displayed. This point awarding performance may be executed multiple times. The point acquisition image E2C is an image that suggests that predetermined points have been awarded, in other words, that the player has acquired predetermined points. The point acquisition image E2C in FIG. 94(B) shows that 4 points (4P) have been awarded to the player (the player has acquired 4 points). Further, in the meter image E2B arranged adjacent to the button image E2A, it is shown that the meter area is expanded by the points and the meter value has increased due to the points being given. The meter value of the meter image E2B increases every time the point awarding effect is executed. That is, the meter value of the meter image E2B represents the cumulative value of the acquired points. This point granting performance is a reach performance, a super reach performance, a chance-up performance (a performance that suggests jackpot expectation level), a jackpot notice performance, a reach development forecast notice performance, a pending change notice, a look-ahead performance, a performance that suggests pending expectation level, or a pseudo It can be started in response to the execution of various performances such as a series of performances.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94(C), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a button image E2A, a meter image E2B, and a chance-up image E2D are displayed. In the meter image E2B placed adjacent to the button image E2A, the meter area is enlarged and the meter value is shown to have reached the maximum (MAX).In addition, the chance-up image E2D suggests an increase in chance. The chance-up image E2D is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX).The chance-up image E2D in FIG. !'' is displayed.The chance-up image E2D is displayed within the button image E2A.

[Display effect B in button image]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining button image display effect B.
In the button image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 95(A), a button meter display effect is executed similarly to FIG. 94(A).
Next, as shown in FIG. 95(B), a point awarding effect is performed in the same manner as in FIG. 94(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(C), the meter MAX notification effect is executed. In this meter MAX notification effect, a button image E2A, a meter image E2B, and a meter value suggestion image E2E are displayed. In the meter image E2B arranged adjacent to the button image E2A, it is shown that the meter area has been expanded and the meter value has reached the maximum (MAX). The meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX), and is an image that suggests that the meter value has reached the maximum (MAX). Further, the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed within the button image E2A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(D), a button press effect is executed. In this button press effect, a button image E2F, a meter value suggestion image E2E, and a meter image E2B are displayed. The button image E2F is displayed in the same size at the position where the button image E2A was, and is an image for prompting the player to operate the production button 63. In other words, the production button 63 is in the valid operation period. This is an image showing that. Specifically, the button image E2F is an image in which "PUSH" is expressed in the image, a state in which the color of the button image E2A is darkened, and/or a state in which the button image E2A appears to be lit. It is. Further, adjacent to the button image E2F, the words "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the production button 63. Note that the effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E2F disappears after the valid operation period has passed. Meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed within button image E2F. Note that the meter value suggestion image E2E may be displayed adjacent to the button image E2F instead of within the button image E2F, or may be displayed within the meter image E2B. Further, the meter value of the meter image E2B in FIG. 95(D) represents the maximum (MAX). Note that the meter value of the meter image E2B is not limited to this, and may return to the initial value (no meter area).

After the button press performance, if the player presses the performance button 63 due to the button press performance, a predetermined performance is executed. The predetermined performances include reach performance, super reach performance, chance-up performance (performance suggesting jackpot expectation level), jackpot notice performance, reach development notice performance, pending change notice, timer display performance, or look-ahead start notice. A performance can be performed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the button image display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, in the button image display effects A and B, when the button image E2A is displayed, the meter image E2B is displayed; After displaying , when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX), a chance-up image E2D or a meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed. According to this configuration, the player who sees the chance-up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E can associate execution of a button effect using the effect button 63. Therefore, when the button effect is actually performed, it is possible to give the player a high expectation of a jackpot regarding the button effect. Further, since a predetermined effect is executed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed, a sense of surprise can be created in the predetermined effect. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, in the button image display effects A and B, the point award effect is executed when the meter image E1B is displayed, and the point award effect is executed when the meter image E1B is displayed. , when the point acquisition image E2C is displayed and predetermined points are awarded, the meter area in the meter image E2B is enlarged by the awarded points, and a display in which the meter value has increased is executed. According to this configuration, the meter value of the meter image increases as points are awarded, so the player can recognize the increase in the meter value due to point acquisition. Therefore, since the chance-up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E can be displayed depending on the change in the meter value, it is possible to give the player a sense of excitement and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, in the button image display effect B, the meter MAX notification effect indicates a meter value that suggests that the meter value of the meter image E2B is the maximum (MAX). Image E2E is displayed in the area where button image E2A is displayed. According to this configuration, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX), the player is reminded that a button performance using the performance button 63 will be executed before the button press performance. Can be done. Therefore, when a button effect (including a button press effect) is actually executed, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation of a jackpot regarding the button effect. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, in the button image display effect B, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX), the player is prompted to press the effect button 63. A prompting button image E2F is displayed, and a meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2F is displayed. According to this configuration, by displaying the meter value suggestion image E2E in the area where the button image E2F is displayed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for a jackpot in a predetermined performance that is developed by pressing the performance button 63. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, in the button image display effects A and B, the display of the chance up image E2D and the meter value suggestion image E2E is based on the meter value of the meter image E2B. Executed at maximum (MAX). According to this configuration, the chance increase image E2D and the meter value suggestion image E2E are displayed when the meter value of the meter image E2B is a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX). When the image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed, expectations for a jackpot can be increased. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the button image display effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, in the button image display effects A and B, the meter image E2B is arranged adjacently below the button image E2A, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, meter image E2B may be displayed within button image E2A. With this configuration, the player can associate a button performance using the performance button 63 in conjunction with the meter display. Therefore, when a button effect is actually performed in connection with the meter display, it is possible to give the player a high sense of expectation regarding the button effect, and other effects are performed instead of the button effect in relation to the meter display. If this is done, a sense of surprise can be given to the player. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. Further, the meter image E2B may be placed a predetermined distance away from the button image E2A in a predetermined direction.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX) in the button image display effects A and B, the button image E2A is displayed. Although the chance up image E2D or the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area (within the button image E2A), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the meter value of the meter image E2B reaches the maximum (MAX), the area where the button image E2A is displayed (within the button image E2A) contains an image suggesting a pseudo-continuous performance, an image suggesting a reach preview, and an image suggesting a jackpot expectation. Various images and timer images may be displayed, such as an image suggesting the button image E2A, or various effects such as a movement of a predetermined character may be executed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed (within the button image E2A). good.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, in the button image display effect B, in the button press effect, the meter value suggestion image E2E is displayed in the area where the button image E2F is displayed (within the button image E2F). Although shown, the present invention is not limited thereto. In the button press effect, for example, in the area where the button image E2F is displayed (within the button image E2F), a chance up image E2D, an image suggesting a pseudo-continuous effect, an image suggesting a reach preview, and a jackpot expectation level are displayed. Various images such as a suggestive image may be displayed, and various effects such as a movement of a predetermined character may be performed in the area where the button image E2A is displayed (within the button image E2A).

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, in the button image display effects A and B, the meter value of the meter image E2B is configured to increase as points are awarded. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, during a button meter display performance, the meter value of the meter image E2B is a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area may be reduced and the meter value will drop as points are awarded in the point award performance. good. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), a chance-up effect shown in FIG. 94(C) or a meter MAX notification effect shown in FIG. 95(C) may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, in the button image display effects A and B, the meter value of the meter image E2B is configured to increase as points are awarded. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of awarding points through a point awarding effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the meter area expands and the meter value increases when a predetermined action is performed. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 94(C) and the meter MAX notification effect shown in FIG. 95(C) are executed. In addition, "the predetermined action has been executed" means, for example, that a pseudo-sequence has been executed, that the hold icon has changed (a hold change display has been performed), or that a predetermined chance-up effect has been executed. This includes success in a certain challenge (game), etc.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, in the button image display effects A and B, the chance up effect and the meter MAX notification effect are such that the meter value of the meter image E2B is the maximum value (MAX ), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the meter MAX notification effect may be executed not when the meter value of the meter image E2B is the maximum value (MAX) but when it reaches a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value or a quarter value of the meter value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be placed in the meter area of the meter image E2B so that the player can understand the predetermined value.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94, after the chance up image E2D is displayed in the chance up effect in the button image display effect A, the meter value of the meter image E2B is set to the initial value (0). You may also change it back to . After that, a point awarding performance may be performed, and a performance that increases the meter value may be performed.
Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, in the button image display effect B, after the meter image E2B is displayed by the button press effect, the meter value of the button image E2A is set to the initial value (0 ). After that, a point awarding performance may be performed, and a performance that increases the meter value may be performed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, button image display effects A and B are executed during one variable effect, but the present invention is not limited to this; for example, button image display effects Performances A and B may be executed across a plurality of variable performances.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display effects and an operation section operable by a player,
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance that displays a first operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The second display effect is an effect that displays a predetermined meter and displays the meter in one of a plurality of modes,
The third display performance is a performance that displays the meter and performs a predetermined display when the meter is in a first mode of the plurality of modes,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the second display effect is performed, and the first display effect is performed while the third display effect is being performed. In the third display effect, when the meter is in the first mode, the predetermined display is performed in the area where the first operation unit image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E2-2]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance in which predetermined points are awarded,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the fourth display performance,
In the combination performance, the fourth display performance is performed while the second display performance is being performed, and when the predetermined points are awarded in the fourth display performance, the fourth display performance is A display is performed in which the meter of the second display effect is in a second mode to a third mode, which is different from the first mode.
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1.
[Aspect E2-3]
The predetermined display performed in the third display effect is a display suggesting that the meter is in the first mode,
The gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 or aspect E2-2.
[Aspect E2-4]
In the combination effect, the first display effect is being performed while the second display effect is being performed, and the meter of the second display effect is the same as the meter of the first display effect. Displayed in the operation part image of 1.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3.
[Aspect E2-5]
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fifth display performance is a performance that displays a second operation unit image that is an operation unit image representing the operation unit and prompts the player to operate the operation unit,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the fifth display performance,
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed when the meter becomes the first mode of the plurality of modes in the third display effect, and then the second operation section the predetermined display is performed in the area where the image is displayed;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-4.
[Aspect E2-6]
In the third display effect, the time when the meter is in the first mode of the plurality of modes is when the value of the meter has reached a maximum value;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-5.

The multiple variation effects will be explained below using FIGS. 96 to 98. This multiple variation performance can be executed during a variation performance of decorative symbols over multiple variations (including a reach performance (super reach performance)).

[Multiple variation effect A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the multiple variation effect A.
In the multiple variation performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 96(A), the variation meter display performance is executed. In this variable meter display performance, a hold icon E3 and a meter image E3C are displayed. The hold icon E3 is composed of a first hold icon E3B (up to eight) representing a hold and a second hold icon E3A representing the hold. In addition, in order to simplify explanation, among the first reservation icons E3B, only the first reservation icons (up to four) corresponding to the reservation of the special drawing 1 are shown in the figure. That is, in the figure, the first hold icon E3B corresponds to the hold image 9A. Hereinafter, multiple variation effects will be shown in the same way.

The meter image E3C is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) moves, and the meter value is expressed by the meter area moving. Further, the meter image E3C is arranged vertically at the right end of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), the variable point awarding effect is executed. This variable point giving performance is a performance executed during the same variable performance as the above-described variable meter display performance, and a hold icon E3, a meter image E3C, and a point acquisition image E3D are displayed. The variable point giving performance may be executed multiple times during the same variable performance. The point acquisition image E3D is an image that suggests that predetermined points have been awarded, in other words, that the player has acquired predetermined points. The point acquisition image E3D in FIG. 96(B) shows that 2 points (2P) have been awarded to the player (the player has earned 2 points). Further, in the meter image E3C, it is shown that as a result of the points being given, the meter area corresponding to the points is enlarged compared to the time of the variable meter display effect, and the meter value has increased. The meter value of the meter image E3C increases each time points are awarded. That is, the meter value of the meter image E3C represents the cumulative value of the acquired points. This variable point granting performance is a reach performance, a super reach performance, a chance-up performance (a performance that suggests jackpot expectation level), a jackpot preview performance, a reach development forecast forecast performance, a pending change notice, a look-ahead performance, a performance that suggests pending expectation level, or , pseudo continuous effect, etc. may be started in response to execution of various effects. Furthermore, the next variable point award performance described below can be similarly executed in response to the execution of these various performances.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), the next variable point granting effect is executed. This next fluctuation point granting performance is a performance executed during the next fluctuation performance of the fluctuation (the fluctuation) in which the above-mentioned fluctuation meter display performance and the fluctuation point granting performance were executed, and the pending icon E3 and the meter Image E3C and point acquisition image E3D are displayed. The next variable point grant performance may be executed multiple times during the same variable performance. The point acquisition image E3D shown in FIG. 96(C) shows that five points (5P) have been awarded to the player (the player has acquired five points). In addition, the meter image E3C shows that as a result of points being awarded, the meter area corresponding to the points is enlarged compared to the time of the variable point granting effect, and the meter value has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D), a button press effect is executed. This button press performance is a performance executed during the same variable performance as the above-described next variable point grant performance, and a button image E3E, a hold icon E3, and a meter image E3C are displayed. The button image E3E is an image for prompting the player to operate the production button 63, and in other words, it is an image indicating that the production button 63 is in a valid operation period. Specifically, the button image E3E is an image in which "PUSH" is expressed in the image and represents a state as if it were lit. Further, adjacent to the button image E3E, the words "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the performance button 63. Note that the effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E3E disappears after the valid operation period has passed. Further, the meter value of the meter image E3C in FIG. 96(D) represents the maximum (MAX).

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), a chance-up effect is executed. In this chance-up effect, a hold icon E3 and a chance-up image E3F are displayed. The chance-up image E3F is an image that suggests a chance-up, and is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the chance-up image E3F of FIG. 96(E), the words "It's super hot!!" are displayed, indicating that there is a high expectation of a jackpot. The chance-up image E3F is expressed as a statement by the ally character CRA.

[Multiple variation performance B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the multiple variation effect B.
In the multiple variation effect B, as shown in FIGS. 97(A) to 97(E), the variable meter display effect, the variable point award effect, the next variable point award effect, the button press effect, and the chance-up effect are included. executed. These effects basically include the variable meter display effect, the variable point award effect, the next variable point award effect, the button press effect, and the chance-up effect shown in FIGS. 96(A) to 96(E). are basically similar to each other, but differ in that the button image E3G is displayed in the variable meter display effect, the variable point award effect, and the next variable point award effect in the multiple variation effect B. This button image E3G is arranged approximately at the center of the display screen 7a, and is an image that suggests the performance button 63, giving a hunch that a performance using the performance button 63 will be executed from now on.

[Multiple variation effects C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the multiple variation effect C.
In the multiple variation performance C, as shown in FIG. 98(A), the variation meter display performance is executed. In this variable meter display effect, a hold icon E3 similar to that shown in FIG. 96(A), a button image E3G similar to that shown in FIG. 97(A), and a meter image E3H are displayed. The meter image E3H is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross-hatching in the figure) moves, and the meter value is represented by the movement of the meter area, and the area where the button image E3G is displayed (within the button image E3G) will be placed in

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), the variable point awarding effect is executed. This fluctuation point giving performance is a performance executed during the same fluctuation performance as the above-mentioned fluctuation meter display performance, and a pending icon E3 similar to that shown in FIG. 96(B) and a point similar to that shown in FIG. 96(B) are displayed. An acquired image E3D, a button image E3G similar to that shown in FIG. 97(B), and a meter image E3H are displayed. This variable point imparting performance may be executed multiple times during the same variable performance. In the meter image E3H, it is shown that the meter area corresponding to the points is enlarged compared to the time of the variable meter display effect and the meter value has increased due to the points being given. The meter value of the meter image E3H increases every time points are awarded. That is, the meter value of the meter image E3H represents the cumulative value of the acquired points.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), the next variable point awarding effect is executed. This next fluctuation point granting performance is a performance executed during the next fluctuation performance of the fluctuation (the fluctuation) in which the above-mentioned fluctuation meter display performance and the fluctuation point granting performance were executed, and is shown in FIG. 96(C). A similar hold icon E3, a point acquisition image E3D similar to that shown in FIG. 96(C), a button image E3G similar to that shown in FIG. 97(C), and a meter image E3H are displayed. This next variable point giving performance can be executed multiple times during the same variable performance. The meter image E3H shows that as a result of points being awarded, the meter area corresponding to the points is enlarged compared to the time of the variable point granting effect, and the meter value has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D), a button press effect is executed. This button press performance is a performance executed during the same variable performance as the above-described next variable point granting performance, and includes a button image E3E similar to that shown in FIG. 96(D) and a hold icon E3 similar to that shown in FIG. 96(D). and meter image E3H are displayed. The meter image E3H is displayed in the area where the button image E3E is displayed (within the button image E3E). The meter value of meter image E3H in FIG. 98(D) represents the maximum (MAX).

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a hold icon E3, a button image E3G, a meter image E3H, and a timer image E3I are displayed. The timer image E3I is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image E3I shown in FIG. 98(E), "100 seconds" is shown as the timer initial value. This timer image E3I is displayed adjacent to the button image E3G. Note that when the timer value of the timer image E3I becomes "0 seconds", a predetermined effect, for example, a chance-up effect as shown in FIG. 97(E) may be executed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of multiple variation effects is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in multiple variable effects A to C, the point awarding effect is executed across a plurality of continuous variable effects, that is, in multiple variable effects. Predetermined points are acquired over time, and meter images E3C and E3H representing the cumulative value of the acquired points (cumulative points) are displayed. When the meter value (cumulative points) of the meter image reaches the maximum (MAX), a button press effect is executed in which a button image E3E prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed. In response to the operation of the performance button 63 by the player, a chance-up performance, a timer display performance, etc. are executed. According to this configuration, even if the accumulated points do not reach the maximum (MAX) in one variable performance, the points are carried over to the next variable performance, so the player can play across multiple variable performances. You can enjoy performances that earn you points. Moreover, since the button press effect is executed when the accumulated points acquired across a plurality of variable effects reach the maximum (MAX), the button press effect can be highlighted. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in the multiple variable effects B and C, the point awarding effect is executed across a plurality of consecutive variable effects, that is, in the plural variable effects. Predetermined points are acquired over time, and meter images E3C and E3H representing the cumulative value of the acquired points (cumulative points) are displayed. While meter images E3C and E3H are being displayed, button image E3G is displayed. According to this configuration, since the execution of a button performance using the performance button 63 can be predicted by accumulating points, a feeling of excitement can be given to the player and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. E3G). According to this configuration, the player can associate a button performance using the performance button 63 in conjunction with the meter display. Therefore, when a button effect is actually performed in connection with the meter display, it is possible to give the player a high sense of expectation regarding the button effect, and other effects are performed instead of the button effect in relation to the meter display. If this is done, a sense of surprise can be given to the player. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, in the multiple variation performances A and B, after the button press performance, a chance-up performance that is a performance that suggests the expectation of a jackpot is executed. According to this configuration, a chance-up effect that suggests the expectation of a jackpot is executed based on points accumulated across multiple variable effects, so the chance-up effect suggests a high expectation of a jackpot. can increase expectations. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, in the multiple variation effect C, the timer display effect is executed after the button press effect. According to this configuration, the timer display effect is executed based on the points accumulated across a plurality of variable effects, so when the timer value of the timer image E3I reaches 0 seconds, the effect is highly expected to be a jackpot. This can increase expectations that the project will be implemented. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation effects A to C, the chance up effect or the timer display effect is such that the meter value of the meter images E3C and E3H is the maximum (MAX). executed when According to this configuration, compared to the case where the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is executed when the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX), the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is more effective. It is possible to increase expectations for a jackpot when the timer display effect is developed. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the multiple variation effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation performances A to C, as part of the look-ahead performance (continuous performance spanning multiple variations), the point grant performance or the next fluctuation point grant It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which points are awarded in a performance (a configuration in which points are earned across a plurality of variable performances as part of a look-ahead performance). According to this configuration, each time a player obtains points, it is possible to increase the expectation of a jackpot, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, the accumulated points are expressed by the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H in the multiple variation effects A to C, but the present invention is not limited to this. It's not something you can do. For example, the cumulative points may be expressed by numbers instead of meter values. Further, the cumulative points may be indicated by representing the remaining points until the cumulative points reach the maximum (MAX) in numbers.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, a button image is displayed when a chance-up effect or a timer display effect is performed in multiple variable effects A to C, and a button image is displayed when a chance-up effect or a timer display effect is performed. Display effects may be performed within the button image. Further, the point acquisition image E3D may be displayed within the button image.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation effects A to C, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are configured to increase as points are awarded. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, during the variable meter display performance, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are at a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area decreases and the meter value decreases due to the point granting by the point granting performance. It may also be a configuration. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), a chance-up effect shown in FIG. 96(C) or a timer display effect shown in FIG. 98(C) may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation effects A to C, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are configured to increase as points are awarded. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of awarding points through a point awarding effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the meter area expands and the meter value increases when a predetermined action is performed. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 96(C) and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 98(C) are executed. In addition, "the predetermined action has been executed" means, for example, that a pseudo consecutive run has been executed, that the hold icon has changed (a hold change display has been performed), or that a predetermined chance-up effect has been executed. This includes success in a predetermined challenge (game), etc.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, in the multiple variation effects A to C, in the chance up effect and the timer display effect, the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are set to the maximum value (MAX). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect may be executed not when the meter values of the meter images E3C and E3H are at the maximum value (MAX), but when they reach a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value or a quarter value of the meter value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be placed in the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the player can understand the predetermined value.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, in the multiple variation effect C, the timer image E3I is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down; however, the present invention is not limited to this. isn't it. For example, the timer image E3I may be displayed in a count-up manner in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when the predetermined value is reached, the above-described button press effect may be executed. Further, a plurality of timer images E3I may be displayed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the multiple variable performances A to C are executed during a plurality of consecutive variable performances, but the present invention is not limited to this. C may be executed for one variation performance.

[Modification 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the multiple variation effects A to C, the chance up effect or the timer display effect is executed after the button press effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. After the performance, other performances may be performed. Other performances include pseudo-continuous performance, reach performance, super reach performance, chance-up performance (performance that suggests jackpot expectation level), jackpot preview performance, reach development forecast performance, pending change notice, or look-ahead start notice. A configuration in which a performance can be performed may also be used.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E3-1]
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol in a variable manner by starting the variable display and then stopping the variable display;
A performance display means capable of performing multiple types of display performances;
an operation section that can be operated by the player;
A gaming machine comprising:
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display performance is a performance in which a predetermined point is acquired over a plurality of consecutive symbol fluctuation displays, and a point suggestion display is performed that suggests the accumulated points acquired;
The second display performance is a performance that displays a first operation unit image that is an operation unit image representing the operation unit and prompts the player to operate the operation unit,
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed, and when the accumulated points in the first display performance reach a predetermined value, the second display performance is performed, and when the player operates the operation unit, the second display performance is performed. Accordingly, a predetermined performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E3-2]
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display performance is a performance that displays a second operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The combination performance is a performance that may include a third display performance,
In the combination effect, the third display effect may be performed while the first display effect is being performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-1.
[Aspect E3-3]
In the combination performance, the point suggestion display in the first display performance may be performed in an area where the second operation unit image in the third display performance is displayed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E3-2.
[Aspect E3-4]
The predetermined performance is a performance that includes a display that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-3.
[Aspect E3-5]
The predetermined performance is a performance including a timer display,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-4.
[Aspect E3-6]
Equipped with a look-ahead performance execution means capable of executing a look-ahead performance,
In the first display performance, a predetermined point is earned across the plurality of consecutive symbol variation displays as the look-ahead performance;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-5.
[Aspect E3-7]
In the combination effect, when the second display effect is performed, it is when the accumulated points reach a maximum value;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E3-1 to E3-6.

The operation charge effect will be explained below using FIGS. 99 to 101. This operation charge performance is performed in parallel with the variation performance of decorative symbols. Of course, this includes the execution of reach effects (super reach effects), etc.

[Operation charge performance A (success)]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining operation charge performance A (success).
First, in the operation charge effect A (success), as shown in FIG. 99(A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start performance, the decorative pattern that is being varied is displayed in the upper left corner. Further, at the bottom of the screen, held images 9A, 9B and held digested images 9C are displayed. The held images 9A, 9B and the held digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(B), a sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, a sword image KG representing the sword member 64 appears from above on the right side of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99(C), a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG that moves downward in the sword movement effect stops.

The handle of the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of regions. Specifically, it is divided into six adjacent regions: regions R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6. The drawing color of these regions R1 to R6 is initially blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99(D), a charge effect (initial stage) is executed. In the charge effect (initial stage), the drawing color of the region R1 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. Then, the drawing color is changed from blue to red in a predetermined order such as region R2→R3→R4→R5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(E), a charge effect (final stage) is executed. In the charge effect (final stage), the drawing color of the region R6 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. This is a change following the change in the drawing color of the region R5 described above.
Next, as shown in FIG. 99(F), a button press instruction effect is executed. In the button press instruction performance, an image instructing the user to press the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 is displayed. Specifically, a text image TG saying "Press!" is displayed along with an arrow image YG instructing to press the button image BG.

[Operation charge performance A (failure)]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining operation charge performance A (failure).
First, in the operation charge effect A (failure), as shown in FIG. 100(A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start performance, the decorative pattern that is being varied is displayed in the upper left corner. Further, at the bottom of the screen, held images 9A, 9B and held digested images 9C are displayed. The held images 9A, 9B and the held digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(B), a sword movement effect is executed. In the sword movement effect, a sword image KG representing the sword member 64 appears from above on the right side of the screen and moves downward.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100(C), a sword stop effect is executed. In the sword stop effect, the sword image KG that moves downward in the sword movement effect stops.

The handle of the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of regions. Specifically, it is divided into six adjacent regions: regions R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6. The drawing color of these regions R1 to R6 is initially blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100(D), a charge effect (initial stage) is executed. In the charge effect (initial stage), the drawing color of the region R1 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. Next, the drawing color of region R2 is changed from blue to red.
Note that the fluctuation start effect, sword movement effect, sword stop effect, and charge effect (initial) shown in Figures 100(A) to 100(D) are the same effects as the operation charge effect (success) shown in Figure 99. It becomes.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(E), a charge effect (mid-term) is executed. In the charge effect (mid-term), the drawing color of the region R3 of the sword image KG is changed from blue to red. This is a change following the change in the drawing color of the region R2 described above.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100(F), a continuous fluctuation effect is executed. In the continuous variation effect, the sword image KG is no longer displayed, and the effect is similar to the variation start effect shown in FIG. 100(A). In other words, when the area R3 changes from blue to red, the charging performance is interrupted and a performance similar to the variation start performance is performed.

[Operation charge performance B]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining operation charge effect B.
First, in operation charge effect B, as shown in FIG. 101(A), a fluctuation start effect is executed. In this variation start performance, the decorative pattern that is being varied is displayed in the upper left corner. Further, at the bottom of the screen, held images 9A, 9B and held digested images 9C are displayed. The held images 9A, 9B and the held digested image 9C are similarly displayed in the following effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(B), a charge notice effect is executed. In the charging preview performance, the charging preview image is displayed with the button image BB1 indicating the performance button 63 being displayed. Here, an oval charging preview image JG1 marked with "C" is displayed. Note that the button image BB1 has five areas: areas S1, S2, S3, S4, and S5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(C), a charging effect is executed. In the charge performance, the drawing color of the button image BB1 area is changed from blue to red, triggered by the appearance of the charge preview image in the charge preview performance described above. Here, the region S1 is shown changing from blue to red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(D), a charge notice effect is executed. The charge notice effect is the effect described in FIG. 101(B), and here the oval charge notice image JG2 marked with "Cx4" is displayed. In addition to the charge image "C", "Cx2", "Cx3", "Cx4", and "Cx5" are prepared as charge preview images. The number of areas to be changed from blue to red is determined by the number written after the "x".

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(E), a charging effect is executed. The charging effect is the effect described in FIG. 101(C), and the drawing color of the button image BB1 area is changed from blue to red in response to the appearance of the charge notice image. Here, four areas S2 to S5 are changed from blue to red in correspondence with the charge preview image JG2 of "C×4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(F), a button press instruction effect is executed. In the button press instruction effect, an image instructing the user to press the effect button 63 is displayed. Specifically, a text image TG saying "Press!" is displayed.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects in this embodiment are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of regions, and the drawing color of these regions is changed from blue to red in a predetermined order, When the drawing color of all areas is changed to red, a button press instruction effect is executed. According to this configuration, the change in the drawing color increases the player's expectations and can improve the interest of the player.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, as shown in FIGS. 101(B) and 101(D), a charge preview image is displayed as a charge preview effect. In response to the display of this charging preview image, a charging effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 101(C) and 101(E). That is, the plurality of regions S1 to S5 are changed from blue to red in a predetermined order. According to this configuration, the display of the charging preview image can arouse a sense of expectation in the player, thereby increasing interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the charging preview image JG1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 101(B), in the charging effect, one region S1 is drawn as shown in FIG. The color changes from blue to red. On the other hand, when charge notice image JG2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 101(D), the drawing color of two or more areas S2 to S5 changes from blue to red, as shown in FIG. 101(E). It will be done. According to this configuration, the level of expectation of the player can be varied depending on the type of charge preview image, and the interest can be increased.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of adjacent regions R1 to R6. According to this configuration, the charging effect becomes easy to understand and the interest can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when all the drawing colors in the regions R1 to R6 become red as shown in FIG. 99(E), the button press instruction effect is executed as shown in FIG. 99(F). be done. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 100(E), if the drawing color of the regions R1 to R3 is red but the regions R4 to R6 are blue, the button press instruction effect is not executed. According to this configuration, expectations are raised as to whether or not the charge effect will be successful, and it is possible to improve interest.

[Modified example]
Modifications of this embodiment will be shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, when the drawing color of all regions R1 to R6 of the sword image KG becomes red, the button press instruction effect is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, when the drawing color of all areas B1 to B5 of the button image BB1 becomes red, the button press instruction effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a button press instruction effect may be executed when the drawing color of a part of the area becomes red.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the handle portion of the sword image KG is divided into a plurality of regions S1 to S6 as shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the entire sword image KG may be divided into a plurality of regions.

[Modification 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the drawing color of the area is changed from blue to red, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if you display a wireframe-like display where the color of the area is the same as the background color, and the drawing color of the area of the wireframe-like image changes (is painted), good.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E4-1]
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising: a display means capable of displaying an image of the operation means,
The image of the operating means has a plurality of regions,
By changing the drawing color of the plurality of areas from a first drawing color to a second drawing color in a predetermined order, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the operating means will transition to an operable state. A gaming machine that does.
[Aspect E4-2]
It is possible to display a specific image at a predetermined timing during fluctuation,
A gaming machine characterized in that, triggered by the display of the specific image, the drawing color of the plurality of areas is changed from a first drawing color to a second drawing color in a predetermined order.
[Aspect E4-3]
When the first specific image among the specific images is displayed, the drawing color of one of the plurality of areas is changed, and when the second specific image among the specific images is displayed, the drawing color of one of the plurality of areas is changed. A gaming machine characterized by changing the drawing color of two or more of the areas.
[Aspect E4-4]
A gaming machine characterized in that the image of the operating means is divided into a plurality of adjacent areas.
[Aspect E4-5]
When all the drawing colors of the plurality of regions become the second drawing color, the operating means becomes operable, and when the drawing colors of the plurality of regions include a region other than the second drawing color, the operating means becomes operable. A game machine characterized by not being able to be operated.

The pseudo continuous point effect will be explained using FIGS. 102 and 103. This pseudo continuous point performance can be executed during a variation performance of decorative symbols (during one variation performance) (for example, at the start of variation of decorative symbols or during a reach performance (super reach performance)).

[Pseudo continuous point production A]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the pseudo linked point effect A.
In the pseudo continuous point effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 102(A), a pseudo continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo-coupling effect, a pseudo-coupling suggestion image E5A and a meter image E5B are displayed. The pseudo-coupling suggestion image E5A is an image reminiscent of a pseudo-coupling effect, and specifically, "Pseudo x 2" indicating that the pseudo-coupling effect is the second time is shown. Further, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 patterns, and the decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the logo pattern suggesting a pseudo-continuous performance. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the form of "7, logo pattern, 7". The meter image E5B is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) moves, and the meter value is expressed by the meter area moving. Further, the meter image E5B is arranged vertically at the right end of the display screen 7a. The pseudo continuous performance can be executed again after the point award performance.

In addition, a pseudo-continuous performance is a performance that is executed at the start of a fluctuating change or a reach performance, etc., for example, a performance that repeats a performance in which decorative symbols start to fluctuate and temporarily stop, or a performance that repeats a performance in which decorative symbols start changing and temporarily stop, or when a predetermined pattern arrangement of decorative symbols is performed. Along with a display that repeatedly temporarily stops at least a part of the logo, a display that repeatedly temporarily stops a predetermined logo, or a display that suggests a pseudo series such as "x2", "x3", or "pseudo", Includes a performance that executes a fluctuating display of decorative patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), a point awarding effect is executed. This point awarding effect is executed in response to the above-described pseudo continuous effect being executed, and a meter image E5B and a point acquisition image E5C are displayed. This point giving performance may be performed when a pseudo-continuous performance is performed again during the same variable performance, or in response to another performance. That is, the point award performance can be executed multiple times during the same variable performance. The point acquisition image E5C is an image that suggests that predetermined points have been awarded, in other words, that the player has acquired predetermined points. The point acquisition image E5C in FIG. 102(B) shows that five points (5P) have been awarded to the player (the player has acquired five points). Further, in the meter image E5B, it is shown that as a result of the points being given, the meter area corresponding to the points is enlarged compared to the time of the variable meter display effect, and the meter value has increased. The meter value of the meter image E5B increases every time points are awarded. That is, the meter value of the meter image E5B represents the cumulative value of the acquired points.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), a button press effect is executed. In this button press effect, a button image E5D and a meter image E5B are displayed. The button image E5D is an image for prompting the player to operate the production button 63, and in other words, it is an image indicating that the production button 63 is in a valid operation period. Specifically, the button image E5D is an image in which "PUSH" is expressed in the image and represents a state as if it were lit. Further, adjacent to the button image E5D, the words "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the production button 63. Note that the effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds. In this case, the button image E3E disappears after the valid operation period has passed. Moreover, the meter image E5B of FIG. 102(C) represents that the meter value is the maximum (MAX).

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), a chance-up effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 within the valid operation period. In this chance-up effect, a chance-up image E5E is displayed. The chance-up image E5E is an image that suggests a chance-up, and is displayed when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX). In the chance-up image E5E of FIG. 102(D), the words "It's super hot!!" are displayed, indicating that the expectation of a jackpot is high. The chance-up image E5E is expressed as a statement by the ally character CRA.

[Pseudo continuous point production B]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining pseudo continuous point effect B.
In the pseudo-continuous point effect B, as shown in FIG. 103(A), a pseudo-continuous point effect is executed. In this pseudo-coupling effect, a pseudo-coupling suggestion image E5A similar to that shown in FIG. 102(A), a button image E5G, and a meter image E5F are displayed. The button image E5G is an image that suggests the performance button 63, and has a hunch that a performance using the performance button 63 may be executed from now on. The meter image E5F is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) moves, and the meter value is expressed by the meter area moving. Further, the meter image E5F is arranged horizontally in the area where the button image E5G is displayed (within the button image E5G). Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at the 7th pattern, and the decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped at the logo pattern that suggests a pseudo-continuous performance, as in FIG. 102(A). That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the form of "7, logo pattern, 7". The pseudo continuous performance can be executed again after the point award performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), a point awarding effect is executed. This point awarding effect is executed in response to the above-described pseudo continuous effect being executed, and a button image E5G, a meter image E5F, and a point acquisition image E5C similar to that shown in FIG. 102(B) are displayed. This point giving performance can be performed again when a pseudo-continuous performance is performed again during the same variable performance, or in response to another performance. That is, the point awarding performance may be executed multiple times. In addition, in the meter image E5F arranged within the button image E5G, it is shown that as a result of points being awarded, the meter area corresponding to the points has been enlarged compared to the time of the variable meter display effect, and the meter value has increased. ing. The meter value of the meter image E5F increases every time points are awarded. That is, the meter value of the meter image E5F represents the cumulative value of the acquired points.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), a button press effect is executed. In this button press effect, a button image E5D and a meter image E5F similar to those shown in FIG. 102(C) are displayed. The meter image E5F is arranged in the area where the button image E5D is displayed, that is, within the button image E5D. Further, the meter image E5F in FIG. 103(C) represents that the meter value is maximum (MAX). Button image E5D has the same shape as button image E5G.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), a timer display effect is executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63 within the valid operation period. In this timer display effect, a button image E3G, a meter image E5F, and a timer image E5H similar to those shown in FIG. 103(A) are displayed. The timer image E5H is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image E5H shown in FIG. 103(D), "100 seconds" is shown as the timer initial value. This timer image E5H is displayed adjacent to the button image E5G. Note that when the timer value of the timer image E5H reaches "0 seconds", a predetermined effect, for example, a chance-up effect shown in FIG. 102(D) or a pseudo continuous effect may be executed again.

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effect of the pseudo linked point effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, pseudo continuous point effects are executed in pseudo continuous point effects A and B, and the cumulative value of points awarded in the point imparting effects (cumulative points). is expressed using the meter values of meter images E5B and E5F, and when the meter value reaches the maximum (MAX), button image E5D is displayed, and when the player presses the production button 63, the chance increases. Performances and timer display performances are executed. According to this configuration, points are accumulated according to the realization of the pseudo continuous effect, and when the accumulated points reach the maximum (MAX), effects such as a chance-up effect or a timer display effect can be executed, so that the pseudo continuous effect can be performed. You can make it more interesting. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, in the pseudo continuous point presentation B, the meter image E5F is displayed during the pseudo continuous presentation or the point award presentation. According to this configuration, execution of the button performance using the performance button 63 can be predicted during the pseudo continuous performance or the point awarding performance, so it is possible to give a feeling of excitement to the player and improve the interest of the game. can be done.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, in the pseudo continuous point effect AB, the meter image E5F indicating accumulated points is arranged in the area where the button image E5G is displayed (within the button image E5G). Ru. According to this configuration, the player can associate a button performance using the performance button 63 in conjunction with the meter display. Therefore, when a button effect is actually performed in connection with the meter display, it is possible to give the player a high sense of expectation regarding the button effect, and other effects are performed instead of the button effect in relation to the meter display. If this is done, a sense of surprise can be given to the player. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102, in the pseudo-continuous point performance A, after the button press performance, a chance-up performance, which is a performance that suggests the expectation level of jackpot, is executed. According to this configuration, a chance-up performance that suggests a high level of expectation for a jackpot is executed based on the points awarded through the pseudo-continuous performance, so there is a sense of expectation that the chance-up performance will suggest a high level of expectation for a jackpot. can be increased. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, in the pseudo continuous point effect B, after the button press effect, a timer display effect is executed. According to this configuration, the timer display effect is executed based on the points awarded by the pseudo continuous effect, so when the timer value of the timer image E5H reaches 0 seconds, the effect with high jackpot expectation is executed. It can increase expectations for the future. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, in the pseudo continuous point effects A and B, in the chance up effect or the timer display effect, the meter value of the meter images E5B and E5G is the maximum (MAX). is executed when According to this configuration, compared to the case where the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is executed when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5G are a predetermined value before the maximum (MAX), the chance-up effect or the timer display effect is more effective. It is possible to increase expectations for a jackpot when the timer display effect is developed. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the pseudo linked point performance is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F reach the maximum (MAX) in the pseudo-continuous effects A and B, the button press effect is Although the present invention is not limited to this, the chance up effect and the timer display effect are executed in response to the player pressing the effect button 63. For example, when the meter values of meter images E5B and E5F reach the maximum (MAX), a chance-up effect or a timer display effect may be executed even if the effect button 63 is not pressed by the player. In addition, when the meter values of meter images E5B and E5F reach the maximum (MAX), the button press effect is not executed (button image E5D is not displayed), and the chance-up effect or timer display effect is executed. Good too.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, in the pseudo continuous point presentations A and B, the accumulated points are represented by the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F. It is not limited. For example, the cumulative points may be expressed by numbers instead of meter values. Further, the accumulated points may be suggested by representing the remaining points until the accumulated points reach the maximum (MAX) as a number.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, a button image is displayed when a chance up performance or a timer display performance is performed in the pseudo continuous point performances A and B, and the button image is displayed when a chance up performance or a timer display performance is performed. A timer display effect may be executed within the button image. Further, the point acquisition image E5C may be displayed within the button image.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, in the pseudo continuous point effects A and B, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are configured to increase as points are added. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during a pseudo continuous performance, the meter values of meter images E5B and E5F are at a predetermined value (for example, the maximum value), and the meter area decreases and the meter value decreases as points are awarded in the point grant performance. Good too. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 0), a chance-up effect shown in FIG. 102(C) or a timer display effect shown in FIG. 103(C) may be executed.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, in the pseudo continuous point effects A and B, the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are configured to increase as points are added. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, instead of awarding points through a point awarding effect, a configuration may be adopted in which the meter area expands and the meter value increases when a predetermined action is performed. In this case, when the meter value reaches a predetermined value, the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 102(C) and the timer display effect shown in FIG. 103(C) are executed. In addition, "the predetermined action has been executed" means, for example, that a pseudo consecutive run has been executed, that the hold icon has changed (a hold change display has been performed), or that a predetermined chance-up effect has been executed. This includes success in a predetermined challenge (game), etc.

[Modification 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102 and FIG. ), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance-up effect and the timer display effect may be executed not when the meter values of the meter images E5B and E5F are at the maximum value (MAX), but when they reach a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value. The predetermined value may be, for example, a half value or a quarter value of the meter value. In this case, a predetermined mark (scale) may be placed in the meter area of the meter image E1B so that the player can understand the predetermined value.

[Modification 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103, in the pseudo continuous point effect B, the timer image E5H is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down; however, the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the timer image E5H may be displayed in a count-up manner in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when the predetermined value is reached, the above-described button press effect may be executed. Further, a plurality of timer images E5H may be displayed.

[Modification 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pseudo continuous point performances A and B are executed during one fluctuating performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo continuous point production A , B may be executed during a plurality of consecutive variable performances.

[Modified example 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, in the pseudo continuous point performances A and B, the chance up performance or the timer display performance is executed after the button press performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the button press effect, the pseudo continuous effect may be performed again. Further, after the button press effect, other effects may be executed. Other performances include a reach performance, a super reach performance, a chance-up performance (a performance that suggests jackpot expectations), a jackpot preview performance, a reach development forecast performance, a pending change notice, or a look-ahead start notice. It may be a configuration that obtains.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E5-1]
A performance display means capable of performing multiple types of display performances;
an operation section that can be operated by the player;
A gaming machine comprising:
A first display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A third display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is a pseudo continuous effect,
The second display performance is a performance in which a certain point is given and a point suggestion display is performed that suggests the accumulated points of the given points,
The third display performance is a performance that displays a first operation unit image that is an operation unit image representing the operation unit and prompts the player to operate the operation unit,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed,
In the combination performance, the first display performance is performed, and in the second display performance, the certain points are given in response to the performance of the first display performance, and the point suggestion display is performed. Thereafter, the third display effect is performed in response to the accumulated points reaching a predetermined value, and the predetermined effect is performed when the player operates the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect E5-2]
A fourth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display performance is a performance that displays a second operation unit image representing the operation unit,
The combination performance is a performance that may include the fourth display performance,
In the combination performance, the fourth display performance may be performed when the first display performance is performed or when the second display performance is performed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E5-1.
[Aspect E5-3]
In the combination performance, the point suggestion display in the second display performance may be performed in an area where the second operation unit image in the fourth display performance is displayed.
The gaming machine according to aspect E5-2.
[Aspect E5-4]
The predetermined performance is a performance that includes a display that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-3.
[Aspect E5-5]
The predetermined performance is a performance including a timer display,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-4.
[Aspect E5-6]
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is performed, it is when the accumulated points reach a maximum value;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E5-1 to E5-5.

The timer freeze effect will be explained using FIGS. 104 to 106. This timer freeze performance can be executed during a fluctuating display of decorative symbols, for example, at the start of a fluctuating display of special symbols, at the start of a fluctuating display of decorative symbols, or during a reach performance (super reach performance).

[Timer freeze effect A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining timer freeze effect A.
First, in timer freeze effect A, as shown in FIG. 104(A), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, timer image I1A is displayed. The timer image I1A is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image I1A shown in FIG. 104(A), "100 seconds" is shown as the timer initial value. Note that in the timer display effect, the ally character CRA is also displayed. In the display effects shown below, the explanation of the ally character CRA will be omitted unless it is particularly necessary. Further, in the upper right of FIG. 104(A), it is shown that the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are the same symbol, and that the decorative symbol 8C is changing, that is, it is shown that it is in the reach state. . In the following, when such a reach state is shown, the explanation will be omitted unless it is particularly necessary.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a timer stop effect is executed. In the timer stop effect, an effect is executed in which the timer value of the timer image I1A stops at "77.7 seconds".
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), a jackpot notification effect is executed in which the timer value stopped by the timer stop effect is reflected in the pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns, and this is notified as a jackpot pattern arrangement.

[Timer freeze effect B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining timer freeze effect B.
First, in timer freeze effect B, as shown in FIG. 105(A), a timer display effect is executed. In this timer display effect, a timer image I1A and a button image I1B are displayed. The button image I1B is an image that suggests the performance button 63, and has a hunch that a performance using the performance button 63 may be performed from now on. The timer image I1A is similar to the timer image I1A in FIG. 104(A), in which the timer value is displayed in a countdown manner, and "100 seconds" is shown as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), a valid button display effect is executed. In the button valid display effect, a button image I1C and a timer image I1A are displayed. The button image I1C is an image for prompting the player to operate the production button 63, and in other words, it is an image indicating that the production button 63 is in a valid operation period. Specifically, the button image I1C is an image in which "PUSH" is expressed in the image, a state in which the color of the button image I1B is darkened, and/or a state in which the button image I1B appears to be lit. It is. Further, adjacent to the button image I1C, the words "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the production button 63. The timer image I1A shows "80 seconds", indicating that the effective operation period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has started from 80 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 105(C), a timer stop effect is executed. In this timer stop performance, in response to the player pressing the performance button 63 using the button valid display performance, a performance is executed in which the timer value of the timer image I1A stops at 77.7 seconds. Since the button valid display effect starts from the timer value of 80 seconds, the effect button 63 may be pressed before the timer value reaches 77.7 seconds (for example, 79 seconds), but in this case, the timer value ( For example, 79 seconds) is rapidly varied and stopped at 77.7 seconds. Note that the timer value is not limited to this, and the timer value may be stopped at once at 77.7 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), similarly to FIG. 104(C), the timer value stopped by the timer stop effect is reflected in the pattern arrangement of the decorative symbols, and this is reported as a jackpot pattern arrangement. A notification performance is executed.

[Timer freeze effect C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining timer freeze effect C.
First, in timer freeze effect C, a timer display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 106(A). In this timer display effect, a timer image I1D and a button image I1B are displayed. The button image I1B, like FIG. 105(A), is an image that suggests the performance button 63, and has a hunch that a performance using the performance button 63 may be performed from now on. In the timer image I1D, a timer value is displayed in a count-up manner, and "0 seconds" is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), a valid button display effect is executed. In the button valid display effect, a button image I1C and a timer image I1D are displayed. The button image I1C, like FIG. 105(B), is an image for prompting the player to operate the performance button 63. In other words, it is an image indicating that the performance button 63 is in a valid operation period. Further, adjacent to the button image I1C, the words "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the production button 63. The timer image I1D shows "75 seconds", indicating that the effective operation period (for example, 3 seconds) of the effect button 63 has started from 75 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 106(C), a timer stop effect is executed. In this timer stop performance, in response to the player pressing the performance button 63 using the button valid display performance, a performance is executed in which the timer value of the timer image I1A stops at 77.7 seconds. Since the button valid display effect starts from the timer value of 75 seconds, the effect button 63 may be pressed before the timer value reaches 77.7 seconds (for example, 76 seconds), but in this case, the timer value ( For example, 76 seconds) is rapidly varied and stopped at 77.7 seconds. Note that the timer value is not limited to this, and the timer value may be stopped at once at 77.7 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), similarly to FIG. 105(D), the timer value stopped by the timer stop effect is reflected in the pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns, and this is reported as a jackpot pattern arrangement. A notification performance is executed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer freeze effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, a timer display (display of a timer image) is executed, and the timer value of the timer display is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds). A display is executed to notify the jackpot using the stopped timer value. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the button image I1C is displayed when the timer display is being executed, and the timer A display for stopping (stopping) the displayed timer value at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) is executed, and a display for notifying a jackpot using the stopped timer value is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and to give him/her the feeling of participating in the game, thereby increasing the player's interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, when the timer stop effect is displayed to stop (stop) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds), When the timer value reaches a value (80 seconds or 75 seconds) earlier than the predetermined value (77.7 seconds), the valid operation period of the production button 63 starts, and the production button 63 is pressed within the valid operation period. When this operation is performed, the timer value is stopped at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of surprise, and it is also possible to prevent the player from missing the timing of operating the production button 63, and it is possible to improve the participation rate in the game. As a result, interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, after the timer stop effect is displayed to stop (stop) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds), the jackpot is reached. In the notification performance, a jackpot is notified by making the pattern arrangement of the decorative symbols the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) stopped in the timer stop performance. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, a timer stop effect is displayed in which the timer value of the timer display is stopped (stopped) at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) that is the zero number. After that, in the jackpot notification performance, the pattern arrangement of the decorative symbols is made the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) that is the zero number stopped in the timer stop performance, so that the jackpot is notified. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the jackpot in an easy-to-understand manner, and the player can quickly recognize the jackpot. As a result, interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the timer freeze effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the button image I1C is displayed when the timer display is executed, and the display of the button image I1C allows the player to operate the production button 63. In response to this, a display that stops (stops) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) is executed, and a display that uses the stopped timer value to notify the jackpot is executed, but the main The invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the button image I1C is displayed and the player does not operate the production button 63, a display that stops (stops) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds) is executed. The timer value that has been stopped may be used to display a notification of a jackpot.
[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, after the timer stop effect is displayed to stop (stop) the timer value of the timer display at a predetermined value (77.7 seconds), the jackpot is reached. In the notification effect, a jackpot is notified by making the pattern arrangement of the decorative symbols the same as the timer value (77.7 seconds) stopped in the timer stop effect, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not something you can do. For example, the timer value (77.7 seconds) of the timer display that was stopped in the timer stop effect may be used as is to notify the jackpot.
[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the timer value to be stopped in the timer stop effect is 77.7, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, other numbers such as 11.1, 111, and 33.3 may be used. Further, the timer value to be stopped in the timer stop effect is not limited to zero, but may be a predetermined value such as 135.
[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the effective operation period of the performance button 63 may be the number of seconds obtained by subtracting a timer value to be stopped by a timer stop performance described later from the starting number of seconds of the effective operation period. For example, when the effective operation period of the effect button 63 starts from 80 seconds and the timer value to be stopped by the timer stop effect is 77.7 seconds, 2.3 seconds may be set as the effective operation period.

[Modification 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer freeze effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images are displayed simultaneously. Good too.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect I1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of displays is a certain display,
The certain display may be displayed in the first mode,
The certain display may be displayed in the second mode,
The certain display may be displayed in a third aspect,
The certain display of the first aspect is a display of an aspect including a display of counting a timer value using a timer image,
The certain display of the second aspect is a display of an aspect including a display that stops the timer value of the timer image at a first predetermined value,
The certain display of the third aspect is a display of an aspect including a display suggesting a jackpot using a timer value of a timer image,
The certain display is a display that may be displayed in the first mode, then displayed in the second mode, and then displayed in the third mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect I1-2]
Equipped with an operation unit that can accept operations from a player and execute a predetermined performance according to the player's operations,
The certain display may be displayed in a fourth aspect,
The certain display of the fourth aspect is a display including a display of an operation unit image that prompts the player to operate the operation unit,
The certain display is displayed in the fourth mode when it is displayed in the first mode, and when the player operates the operation unit by displaying the operation unit image in the fourth mode. The display may be displayed in the second mode depending on the situation, and may be displayed in the third mode after being displayed in the second mode.
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-1, characterized in that:

[Aspect 3]
When the second mode is displayed in the certain display, when the timer value reaches a second predetermined value that is earlier than the first predetermined value, the operation of the operating unit is enabled. starts a period, and when the operation unit is operated within the operation validity period, the timer value is stopped at the first predetermined value;
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-2, characterized in that:

[Aspect 4]
The third aspect is a display suggesting a jackpot using a decorative pattern,
In the case where the third mode is displayed after the second mode is displayed in the certain display, the pattern arrangement of the decorative patterns is changed to the second mode that was inhibited in the second mode. By making it the same as the predetermined value of 1, it suggests a jackpot,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I1-1 to I1-3, characterized in that:

[Aspect 5]
The pattern arrangement of the decorative pattern that is the same as the first predetermined value that is stopped in the second aspect is a zero number;
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-1, characterized in that:

The chance up meter effect will be explained below using FIGS. 107 to 109. This chance up meter effect is performed during a jackpot game, during a decorative pattern fluctuation display (for example, at the start of a special symbol fluctuation display, at the start of a decorative symbol fluctuation display, or during a reach performance (super reach performance), etc.) can be executed.

[Chance up meter performance A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining chance up meter effect A.
In the chance up meter effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 107(A), a chance up meter image I2A and a timer image I2B are displayed. The chance-up meter image I2A includes a meter image I2AA, a cursor image I2A1, a chance-up suggestion image I2A2, and a chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3. The meter image I2AA is a meter in which the meter area (represented by cross hatching in the figure) formed by the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the end position, and the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the end position. represents the period of chance up meter production. The chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 is arranged on the meter image I2AA. A chance-up effect may be executed when the cursor image I2A1 moves and overlaps (coincides with) the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3. When the chance-up effect is executed, the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3 is changed to the chance-up completion suggestion image I2A2. The chance up suggestion image I2A2 is placed on the meter image I2AA, and suggests that the chance up effect has been executed at that timing.

That is, in the meter image I2AA, the cursor image I2A1 moves from the start position to the chance-up schedule suggestion image I2A3, thereby representing the period from the start of the chance-up meter effect to the timing at which the chance-up effect can be executed.

The timer image I2B is displayed while the chance up meter image I2A is being displayed. For example, the timer image I2B is displayed at the start of the chance-up meter effect or at a predetermined timing after the chance-up suggestion image I2A2 is displayed. In the timer image I2B, the timer value is displayed in a countdown manner, and 15 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 107(B) or the timing mismatch display effect shown in FIG. 107(D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 107(B), in the timing match display effect, the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A, and the timing when the timer value in the timer image I2B becomes 0 seconds. A performance is performed to show that the two match. Note that the timing matching display effect is not limited to this, and the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image I2B are set to predetermined values (for example, 7.77 seconds) may coincide with the timing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(C), a high expectation chance up effect is executed. In the high expectation chance up effect, a high expectation chance up image I2C is displayed. The high expectation chance up image I2C is an image that suggests that the jackpot expectation is relatively high.

On the other hand, in the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 107(D), the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A and the timing at which the timer value in the timer image I2B becomes 0 seconds are different. A performance is performed to indicate that there is no match. Note that the timing mismatch display effect is not limited to this, and the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image I2B are set to predetermined values (for example, 7.77 seconds) may be an effect indicating that the timing does not match.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(E), a low expectation chance up effect is executed. In the low expectation chance up effect, a low expectation chance up image I2D is displayed. The low expectation chance up image I2D is an image that suggests that the jackpot expectation is relatively low. That is, when the low expectation chance up image I2D appears, the jackpot expectation is lower than when the high expectation chance up image I2C appears.

[Chance up meter performance B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining chance up meter effect B.
In chance up meter effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 108(A), a chance up meter image I2A, a timer image I2B, and a button image I2E are displayed. Since the chance up meter image I2A and the timer image I2B are the same as those shown in FIG. 107(A), their explanation will be omitted. The button image I2E is an image that suggests the performance button 63, and has a hunch that a performance using the performance button 63 may be performed from now on.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 108(B) or the timing mismatch display effect shown in FIG. 108(D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 108(B), in the timing matching display effect, similarly to FIG. 107(B), the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A, and the timer image I2B An effect indicating that the timing when the timer value becomes 0 seconds is performed.

Additionally, a button image I2F is displayed. The button image I2F is an image for prompting the player to operate the production button 63, and in other words, it is an image indicating that the production button 63 is in a valid operation period. Specifically, the button image I2F is an image in which "PUSH" is expressed in the image, a state in which the color of the button image I2E is made darker, and/or a state in which the button image I2E appears to be lit. It is. Further, adjacent to the button image I2F, the words "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the production button 63. The button image I2F is displayed after the timer value of the timer image I2B reaches "0 seconds". The present invention is not limited to this, and may be displayed after the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, the timer value is 1 second) before reaching "0 seconds". Note that the effective operation period of the effect button 63 may be, for example, 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(C), a high expectation chance up effect is executed. In the high-expectation chance-up effect, when the button image I2F is displayed and the player presses the effect button 63, a high-expectation chance-up image I2C is displayed. The high-expectation-level chance-up image I2C is an image that suggests that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, similar to FIG. 107(C).

On the other hand, in the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 108(D), similarly to FIG. 107(D), the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A and the timer image in the timer image I2B An effect is performed to indicate that the timing at which the value reaches 0 seconds does not match. Additionally, a button image I2F is displayed. The button image I2F is an image similar to that shown in FIG. 108(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(E), a low expectation chance up effect is executed. In the low expectation chance up effect, a low expectation chance up image I2D is displayed. The low expectation chance up image I2D is an image that suggests that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, similar to FIG. 108(E).

[Chance up meter performance C]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the chance up meter effect C.
In the chance up meter effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 109(A), a chance up meter image I2A, a timer image I2G, and a button image I2E are displayed. The chance up meter image I2A and the button image I2E are the same as those shown in FIG. 108(A), so their explanation will be omitted. The timer image I2G is displayed while the chance up meter image I2A is being displayed. For example, the timer image I2G is displayed at the start of the chance-up meter effect or at a predetermined timing after the chance-up suggestion image I2A2 is displayed. In the timer image I2G, a timer value is displayed in a count-up manner, and 0 seconds is set as the initial value of the timer.

Next, the timing match display effect shown in FIG. 109(B) or the timing mismatch display effect shown in FIG. 109(D) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 109(B), in the timing matching display effect, when the timer value of timer image I2G reaches a predetermined value (for example, 15 seconds), button image I2H is displayed. The button image I2H is an image for prompting the player to operate the production button 63, and in other words, it is an image indicating that the production button 63 is in a valid operation period. Specifically, the button image I2H is an image in which "PUSH" is expressed in the image, a state in which the color of the button image I2E is darkened, and/or a state in which the button image I2E appears to be lit. It is. Further, adjacent to the button image I2H, the words "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the performance button 63.
In the timing matching display effect, the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A, and the timing when the timer value of the timer image I2G reaches a predetermined value and the button image I2H is displayed. indicates that they match.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(C), a high expectation chance up effect is executed. In the high-expectation chance-up performance, a high-expectation chance-up image I2C is displayed in response to the player pressing the performance button 63 when the button image I2H is displayed. The high-expectation-level chance-up image I2C is an image that suggests that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, similar to FIG. 107(C).

On the other hand, in the timing mismatch effect shown in FIG. 109(D), the button image I2H is displayed when the timer value of the timer image I2G reaches a predetermined value (for example, 15 seconds), similarly to FIG. 109(B). In the timing mismatch display effect, the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A, and the timing when the timer value of the timer image I2G reaches a predetermined value and the button image I2H is displayed. indicates that they do not match.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(E), a low expectation chance up effect is executed. In the low expectation chance up effect, a low expectation chance up image I2D is displayed. The low expectation chance up image I2D is an image that suggests that the jackpot expectation is relatively low, similar to FIG. 107(E).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the chance up meter effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timer display (timer image display) is executed while the chance up meter image I2A is displayed (chance up meter effect). ing. According to this configuration, since a display is made that deals with two different types of time, the player can feel a sense of anticipation as time passes. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image reach a predetermined value A high-expectation chance-up performance or a low-expectation chance-up performance may be executed based on the timing. According to this configuration, the highly anticipated chance-up effect can be executed based on the displays that handle two different types of time, so the player can have a greater sense of anticipation for the progress of these displays. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image reach a predetermined value If the timing matches, a high expectation chance increase effect may be executed. According to this configuration, when the displays that handle two different types of time are synchronized, a high expectation chance increase effect can be executed, so that the player can have high expectations for the progress of these displays. can. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A and the timer value in the timer image reach a predetermined value If the timing does not match, a low expectation chance up effect may be executed. According to this configuration, when the displays handling two different types of time are not synchronized, a low expectation chance increase effect can be executed, so that the player has greater expectations for the progress of these displays. I can do it. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, when the timer value of the timer image I2G reaches a predetermined value in the timing match display effect or the timing mismatch display effect, the player is prompted to press the effect button 63. A button image I2H is displayed to encourage pressing of the button. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player the feeling of participating in the game, and it is possible to increase interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the chance up meter performance is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a chance up meter display and a timer display are executed as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a chance up meter display and other displays representing the passage of time may be performed. Here, the other display representing the passage of time may be, for example, a meter or an indicator representing time.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, in the timing matching display effect, the timing when the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A and the timing in the timer image Although the high expectation chance up effect is configured to be executed when the timer value reaches a predetermined value, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the timings match, various performances such as a pseudo-continuous performance, a performance indicating the type of reach, and a notice suggesting development to a super reach performance may be executed. In this case, the performance after the timing mismatch display performance may be different from these performances. In this case as well, the performance that is executed when the timings match is selected as the performance that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the performance that is performed when the timings do not match.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 109, timing mismatch display effects are used to determine the timing at which the cursor image I2A1 reaches the chance up schedule suggestion image I2A3 in the chance up meter image I2A, and the timing in which the timer image Although the present invention is configured such that the low expectation chance up effect is executed when the timing at which the timer value reaches a predetermined value does not match, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the timings do not match, various effects may be performed, such as a pseudo-continuous effect, a effect indicating the type of reach, and a notice suggesting that the reach effect will develop into a super reach effect. In this case, the performance after the timing match display performance may be different from these performances. In this case as well, the performance to be executed when the timings do not match is selected to be a performance with a lower level of jackpot expectation than the performance to be performed when the timings match.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the chance up meter effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images can be displayed simultaneously. It's okay.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as a chance up effect, the high expectation chance up image I2C and the low expectation chance up image I2D are used to suggest an up chance. It is not limited. For example, to increase your chances, you can specifically display the expected jackpot (such as "Expected 50%!"), use colors to indicate the expected jackpot, or use audio to indicate the expected jackpot. A predetermined character may be displayed to suggest the degree of jackpot expectation.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect I2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first period display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a second period display,
One of the plurality of types of displays is a first effect display,
The first period display is a display that may be displayed during a certain period of the period in which the reach effect display is being performed,
The first period display is a display including a cursor display,
The cursor display moves from the start position to the end position through a specific position to represent the period from start to end,
The first period display is a display including a specific position display that notifies the specific position,
The cursor display moves from the start position to the specific position to represent the period from the start of the certain period to a first timing,
The first timing is a timing when displaying the first effect display may be started while the reach effect display is being displayed,
The second period display may be executed during the first period display;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I2-2]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a second performance display different from the first performance display,
The second period display is a timer display,
When performing the second period display during the first period display, the second effect is performed based on the first timing and a second timing when the timer display reaches a predetermined value. Display may be performed,
The gaming machine according to aspect I2-1.
[Aspect I2-3]
In the case where the second period display is executed during the first period display, when the first timing and the second timing at which the timer display reaches a predetermined value match, the first period display is executed. The second effect display may be executed at the timing of
The gaming machine according to aspect I2-2, characterized in that:
[Aspect I2-4]
When executing the second period display during the first period display, if the first timing and the second timing at which the timer display reaches a predetermined value do not match, the The first effect display may be executed at a first timing;
The gaming machine according to aspect I2-2 or aspect I2-3, characterized in that:
[Aspect I2-5]
The first effect display is a display including a first chance-up effect,
The second effect display is a display including a second chance-up effect that has a higher jackpot expectation than the first chance-up effect.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-2 to I2-4, characterized in that:
[Aspect I2-6]
The second performance display is a performance that has a higher jackpot expectation than the first performance display.
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2 to 5, characterized in that:
[Aspect 7]
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display of an operation unit image to encourage the player to operate the operation unit,
when the timer display is being executed, the display of the operation unit image is executed;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-6, characterized in that:

The hold timer effect will be explained below using FIGS. 110 to 112. This hold timer performance is performed during a fluctuating display of decorative symbols (for example, at the start of a fluctuating display of special symbols, at the start of a fluctuating display of decorative symbols, during a reach performance (super reach performance)), or during a jackpot game. can be executed. It should be noted that the pending timer effects A and B are effects that can be executed across multiple variations, and the pending timer effect C is a production that can be executed in the variation.

[Hold timer performance A]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the hold timer effect A.
In the hold timer effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 110(A), a hold icon I3 and a timer image I3C are displayed. The hold icon I3 is composed of a first hold icon I3B (up to eight) representing a hold and a second hold icon I3A representing the hold. In addition, in order to simplify explanation, only the 1st reservation icon (maximum 4) corresponding to the reservation of special figure 1 among the 1st reservation icons I3B are shown in the figure. Therefore, the first hold icon I3B in the figure corresponds to the hold image 9A. Hereinafter, the hold timer effects will be shown in the same way.

The timer image I3C is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. The timer image I3C shown in FIG. 110(A) shows 15 seconds as the timer initial value. This timer image I3C is displayed adjacent to and associated with the specific first hold icon I3B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(B), a timeout display effect is executed. In this timeout display effect, as the hold is shifted, the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C is shifted to the right by one position, and after that, the timer value of the timer image I3C becomes 0 seconds. Ru. Note that the upper right of FIG. 110(B) shows that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the process of changing, that is, it is shown that all the decorative patterns are in the process of changing. In the following, description of such a state will be omitted unless it is particularly necessary.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110(C), a pending change display effect is executed. In this hold change display performance, the color of the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C changes, and characters indicating "heat" are displayed on the hold icon. Thereby, it can be suggested that the jackpot expectation level has increased in the variable performance corresponding to the first pending icon I3B that was associated with the timer image I3C. That is, the pending change display performance suggests the jackpot expectation level of the variable performance corresponding to the first pending icon I3B that was associated with the timer image I3C.

[Hold timer performance B]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the hold timer effect B.
In the hold timer effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 111(A), a hold icon I3 (a first hold icon I3B and a second hold icon I3A), a timer image I3C, and a button image I3D are displayed. The hold icon I3 and the timer image I3C are the same as those shown in FIG. 110(A), so their explanation will be omitted.
The button image I3D is an image that suggests the performance button 63, and has a hunch that a performance using the performance button 63 may be executed from now on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(B), a timeout display effect is executed. In this timeout display effect, as the hold is shifted, the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C is shifted to the right by one position, and then the timer value of the timer image I3C becomes "0" seconds. executed.

Further, in the timeout display effect, a button image I3E is displayed. The button image I3E is an image for prompting the player to operate the production button 63, and in other words, it is an image indicating that the production button 63 is in a valid operation period. Specifically, the button image I3E is an image in which "PUSH" is expressed in the image, a state in which the color of the button image I3D is darkened, and/or a state in which the button image I3D appears to be lit. It is. Further, adjacent to the button image I3E, the words "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the performance button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111(C), a suspension expectation level suggestion effect is executed. In this hold expectation level suggestion effect, a hold expectation level suggestion image I3F is displayed so as to correspond to the first hold icon I3B associated with the timer image I3C. The hold expectation level suggestion image I3F suggests the jackpot expectation level of the fluctuating effect corresponding to the associated first hold icon I3B. The hold expectation level suggestion image I3F is displayed using the same frame as the timer image I3C.

[Hold timer performance C]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the hold timer effect C.
In the hold timer effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 112(A), a hold icon I3 (a first hold icon I3B and a second hold icon I3A), a timer image I3C, and a button image I3D are displayed. In this case, the timer image I3C is displayed adjacent to and associated with the second hold icon I3A. The functions of the hold icon I3, the timer image I3C, and the button image I3D are the same as those in FIG. 111(A), so a description thereof will be omitted. Note that in this hold timer effect, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(B), a timeout display effect is executed. In this timeout display effect, a button image I3E is displayed as in FIG. 111(B), and an effect in which the timer value of the timer image I3C becomes "0" seconds is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112(C), a pseudo-continuous effect is executed. In this pseudo-coupling effect, a pseudo-coupling suggestion image I3G is displayed so as to correspond to the second pending icon I3A associated with the timer image I3C. The pseudo-continuation suggestion suggestion image I3G suggests that a pseudo-continuation presentation is being executed in the variable presentation (the relevant variation presentation) corresponding to the associated second pending icon I3A, and the number of pseudo-continuation presentations. . The pseudo-association suggestion image I3G is displayed using the same frame as the timer image I3C.

In addition, a pseudo-continuous performance is a performance that is executed at the start of a fluctuating change or a reach performance, etc., for example, a performance that repeats a performance in which decorative symbols start to fluctuate and temporarily stop, or a performance that repeats a performance in which decorative symbols start changing and temporarily stop, or when a predetermined pattern arrangement of decorative symbols is performed. Along with a display that repeatedly temporarily stops at least a part of the logo, a display that repeatedly temporarily stops a predetermined logo, or a display that suggests a pseudo series such as "x2", "x3", or "pseudo", Includes a performance that executes a fluctuating display of decorative patterns.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold timer effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and a predetermined performance (hold icon) is displayed based on the timer value of the timer image I3C. A change display performance, a pending expectation level suggestion performance, or a pseudo-continuation performance) is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the reservation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and the timer image I3C is associated with the pending icon I3 based on the timer value of the timer image I3C. A predetermined effect (a hold change display effect, a hold expectation level suggestion effect, or a pseudo continuous effect) is executed for the hold icon I3 that has been displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to further attract the player's interest in a specific reservation, and as a result, it is possible to improve interest.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed adjacent to each other, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112. According to this configuration, the player can quickly recognize the correspondence between the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3, and the player's interest in a specific hold can be increased. As a result, interest can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and the timer image I3C is associated with the pending icon I3 based on the timer value of the timer image I3C. A performance that suggests a jackpot expectation level (a hold change display performance or a performance that suggests a hold expectation level) is performed for the held hold icon I3. According to this configuration, since an effect indicating the expectation of jackpot is executed for the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C, it is possible to deepen the player's interest, and as a result, It can improve your interest.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and based on the timer value of the timer image I3C, the hold icon I3C is associated with the timer image I3C. A pending change display effect is executed for the icon I3. According to this configuration, since the aspect of the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C changes, the player's interest can be deepened, and as a result, the player's interest can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C and the hold icon I3 are displayed in association with each other, and the timer value of the timer image I3C becomes a predetermined value (0 seconds). In this case, a predetermined effect (a hold change display effect, a hold expectation degree suggestion effect, or a pseudo continuous effect) is performed on the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C. According to this configuration, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the hold icon I3 associated with the timer image I3C until the timer value of the timer image I3C reaches a predetermined value, and as a result, the player's interest is reduced. can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, when the timer image I3C reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), a button image I3E that prompts the player to operate the production button 63 is displayed. However, when the player operates the performance button 63, a predetermined performance (pending expectation level suggesting performance or pseudo continuous performance) is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the timing to operate the performance button 63, and it is possible to improve the participation rate in the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the hold timer performance is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image I3C may be displayed in a count-up manner in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when the predetermined value is reached, the above-described timeout display effect may be executed.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the timer image I3C is displayed in association with the second hold icon I3A, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), a pseudo continuous effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include other performances, such as a suspension change display performance as shown in FIG. 110(C), a performance suggesting the degree of suspension expectation as shown in FIG. A close-up effect may be performed.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 or 111, the timer image I3C is displayed in association with the first hold icon I3B, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (0 seconds), a hold change display effect or a hold expectation level suggestion effect is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to perform other effects, such as a pseudo continuous effect or a chance-up effect.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, the timer image I3C is displayed in association with the hold icon I3, and when the timer value reaches 0 seconds, a predetermined effect (hold change display effect, A suspension expectation level suggesting performance or a pseudo-continuation performance) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer image I3C may be displayed in association with the hold icon I3, and when the timer value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 7.77 seconds), a predetermined effect may be performed.

[Modification 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the hold timer effects A to C shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more timer images are displayed. The timer images may be displayed simultaneously.

[Modification 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the hold timer effects A and B shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 are effects that are executed over multiple variations, but the present invention is not limited to this, It may also be a performance that is performed only by the user. Further, although the hold timer effect C shown in FIG. 112 is an effect executed during the variation, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be an effect executed across a plurality of variations.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect I3-1]
A gaming machine comprising a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of pending icons,
The hold icon includes an icon representing a hold and an icon representing the hold,
It is configured such that the number of holds can be notified by the number of displayed hold icons,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of effects,
A first performance may be performed as one of the plurality of performances,
A second performance may be performed as one of the multiple performances,
The first performance is a performance that displays a timer,
A combination performance including the first performance and the second performance may be performed, and in the combination performance, the timer display of the first performance and the hold icon are displayed in association with each other, the second performance is performed based on a timer display of the first performance;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I3-2]
In the combination effect, the timer display of the first effect and the hold icon are displayed in association with each other, and based on the timer display, the second hold icon associated with the timer display is displayed. There will be a performance of
The gaming machine according to aspect I3-1.
[Aspect I3-3]
In the combination effect, the timer display of the first effect and the hold icon are displayed adjacent to each other.
The gaming machine according to aspect I3-1 or aspect I3-2, characterized in that [Aspect I3-4]
The second performance is a performance that displays a suggestion of jackpot expectation level,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 3, characterized in that:
[Aspect I3-5]
The jackpot expectation level suggestion display is a display that may change the aspect of the pending icon,
The gaming machine according to aspect I3-4, characterized in that:
[Aspect I3-6]
In the combination performance, when the timer display of the first performance reaches a predetermined value, the second performance is performed;
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I3-1 to I3-5, characterized in that:
[Aspect I3-7]
Equipped with an operation section that can be operated by the player,
In the combination performance, when the timer display of the first performance reaches a predetermined value, an operation unit image is displayed that prompts the player to operate the operation unit, and if the player does not operate the operation unit, The second performance is performed when
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I3-1 to I3-6, characterized in that:

The timer ball acquisition effect will be explained below using FIGS. 113 to 115. This ball acquisition performance can be executed during a variation performance of decorative symbols, for example, during a reach performance (super reach performance). In particular, the timer ball acquisition performance may be executed at the final stage of the reach performance (super reach performance).

[Timer ball acquisition performance A]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining timer ball acquisition performance A.
In the timer ball acquisition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 113(A), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification performance, a jackpot symbol arrangement using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is shown. In FIG. 113(A), the jackpot symbol arrangement is a complete set of 7 symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(B), a timer display effect is executed. In the timer display effect, a timer image I4A and an ally character CRA are displayed. The timer image I4A is displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down. In the timer image I4A shown in FIG. 113(B), "5 seconds" is shown as the timer initial value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(C), a scheduled payout ball display effect is executed. In the scheduled payout ball display effect, when the timer value of the timer image I4A reaches 0 seconds, the scheduled payout ball number suggestion image I4B is displayed. The scheduled payout ball number suggestion image I4B is an image that suggests the jackpot number of balls scheduled to be paid out in the jackpot game. In the example of FIG. 113(C), the scheduled payout ball number suggestion image I4B indicates that 1500 balls can be paid out during the jackpot game.

[Timer ball acquisition performance B]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the timer ball acquisition effect B.
In the timer ball acquisition effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 114(A), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification performance, a jackpot symbol arrangement using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is shown, similar to FIG. 113(A).

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(B), a timer display effect is executed. In the timer display effect, the timer image I4A and the ally character CRA are displayed as in FIG. 113(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(C), a button press promotion display effect is executed. In this button press promotion display effect, the timer value of timer image I4A becomes "0 seconds" and button image I4C is displayed. The button image I4C is an image for prompting the player to operate the production button 63, and in other words, it is an image indicating that the production button 63 is in a valid operation period. Specifically, the button image I4C is an image in which "PUSH" is represented in the image and represents a state as if it were lit. Further, adjacent to the button image I4C, the words "Press!!" are also displayed to prompt the player to operate the production button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(D), a scheduled payout ball display effect is executed. In this scheduled payout ball display performance, in response to the player pressing the performance button 63, the scheduled payout ball number suggestion image I4B is displayed as in FIG. 113(C).

[Timer ball acquisition performance C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the timer ball acquisition performance C.
In the timer ball acquisition effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 115(A), a jackpot notification effect is executed. In this jackpot notification performance, a jackpot symbol arrangement using decorative symbols is shown, similar to FIG. 113(A).

Next, the timer display effect shown in FIG. 115(B) (timer initial value is large) or the timer display effect shown in FIG. 115(E) (timer initial value is small) is executed.
As shown in FIG. 115(B), in the timer display effect (timer initial value large), a timer image I4D with a relatively large timer initial value of "15 seconds" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(C), a button press promotion display effect is executed. In this button press promotion display performance, the timer value of the timer image I4D becomes "0 seconds" and the button image I4C is displayed as in FIG. 114(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(D), a scheduled payout ball display effect is executed. In this scheduled payout ball display performance, similar to FIG. 114(D), in response to the player pressing the performance button 63, it is suggested that the number of balls scheduled to be paid out is a relatively large number of 1500 balls. An image I4B suggesting the number of balls to be paid out is displayed.

On the other hand, in the timer display effect (timer initial value small) shown in FIG. 115(E), a timer image I4A with a relatively small timer initial value of "5 seconds" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115(F), a button press promotion display effect is executed. In this button press promotion display effect, the timer value of timer image I4A becomes "0 seconds" and button image I4C is displayed, as in FIG. 114(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(G), a scheduled payout ball display effect is executed. In this scheduled payout ball display performance, in response to the player pressing the performance button 63, the scheduled payout ball number suggestion image I4E suggests that the number of balls scheduled to be paid out is a relatively small number of 700 balls. is displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the timer ball acquisition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, and images I4B and I4E suggesting the number of balls to be paid out are displayed. According to this configuration, the timer display is performed before the display indicating the number of balls scheduled to be paid out is performed, so that the player's interest in the number of balls scheduled to be paid out can be increased. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, and after the timer value reaches 0 seconds, images I4B and I4E suggesting the number of balls to be paid out are displayed. be done. According to this configuration, since the number of balls scheduled to be paid out is displayed when the timer value reaches 0 seconds, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the number of balls scheduled to be paid out. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, timer images I4A and I4C are displayed, and a button image I4C that prompts the player to press the production button 63 is displayed. In response to the depression of the production button 63, images I4B and I4E suggesting the number of balls to be paid out are displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player the feeling of participating in the game, and it is possible to increase interest.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115, when the timer display effect is executed in the timer ball acquisition effect C, when the timer image I4D with a relatively large timer initial value is displayed. Compared to the case where the timer image I4A with a relatively small initial timer value is displayed, the value representing the number of balls scheduled to be paid out indicated by the number of balls suggested to be paid out in the scheduled payout ball display performance is large. . According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the timer display before the image suggesting the number of balls to be paid out is displayed. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the timer ball acquisition performance will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, in the button press promotion display effect, the button image I4C is displayed after the timer values of the timer images I4A and I4D reach 0 seconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the button image I4C may be displayed when the timer values of the timer images I4A and I4D reach a predetermined value (for example, 2 seconds) before reaching 0 seconds.

[Modification 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer ball acquisition effects shown in FIGS. 113 to 115 are performed at the start of the variable display of special symbols, during the variable display of decorative symbols, or during the reach effect (super reach effect), etc. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timer display performance, the button press promotion performance, and the scheduled payout ball display performance among the timer playout ball acquisition performances may be configured to be executed during the jackpot game.

[Modification 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, one timer image is displayed in the timer ball acquisition performance shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the The timer image may also be displayed at the same time.

[Modification 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer images I4A and I4D are displayed in a countdown manner in which the timer value counts down, as shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, the timer images I4A and I4D may be displayed in a count-up manner in which the timer value counts up. In this case, when the predetermined value is reached, the above-described timeout display effect may be executed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect I4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying multiple types of displays,
One of the plurality of types of displays is a certain display,
The certain display is a display that is performed when winning a jackpot lottery,
The certain display may be displayed in the first mode,
The certain display may be displayed in the second mode,
The first aspect is an aspect including a timer display,
The second aspect is an aspect including a scheduled payout number suggestion display that suggests the number of game media scheduled to be paid out during a jackpot game based on a jackpot,
The certain display is a display that may be displayed in the second mode after being displayed in the first mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I4-2]
The certain display is displayed in the second mode after the timer value of the timer display reaches a first predetermined value in the first mode.
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-1, characterized in that:
[Aspect I4-3]
Equipped with an operation unit that can accept operations from a player and execute a predetermined performance according to the player's operations,
The certain display may be displayed in a third aspect,
The third aspect is an aspect including displaying an operation unit image that prompts the player to operate the operation unit,
The certain display is displayed in the first mode, and while being displayed in the first mode, it is displayed in the third mode, and then the operation unit is operated by the player. may be displayed in the second mode depending on the
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-1 or aspect I4-2, characterized in that:
[Aspect I4-4]
The certain display is displayed in the first mode, is displayed in the third mode before the timer value in the first mode reaches a second predetermined value, and is then displayed in the third mode when the player performs the operation. The display may be displayed in the second mode depending on the operation of the section.
The gaming machine according to aspect I4-3, characterized in that:
[Aspect I4-5]
In the first aspect, the initial value of the timer value may be a first value and a second value larger than the first value,
In the case where the certain display is displayed in the first mode and then in the second mode, when the initial value of the timer value in the first mode is the second value. is the number of gaming media scheduled to be paid out indicated by the scheduled payout number suggestion display in the second aspect compared to the case where the initial value of the timer value in the first aspect is the first value. The value represented is large,
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I4-1 to I4-4, characterized in that:

[Other variations]
Although the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel type game machine such as a slot machine, an arranged ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

Although the game machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with the production button 63 as an operation section to be operated by a player, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a handle, a trigger, etc. may be used as an operation section to be operated by a player. Good too. Further, in the display performance in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display performance may be executed using a button image representing the performance button 63, but instead of this, the display performance may be executed using an image representing the sword member 64. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the timer value of the timer image is used to represent the time as a timer display, but the timer display is not limited to this, and the time may be represented using a meter method or an indicator method.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1 described above, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

Furthermore, two or more examples and/or modifications of the plurality of examples and/or modifications described above may be combined. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub-display device in addition to the image display device 7. In this case, the above-described display effect may be executed on the sub display device.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modified examples, the embodiments of the above-described aspect are for facilitating understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

1...Game machine 3...Game area 7...Image display device (display means)
7a... Display screen 9A, 9B, 9C... Hold icon 15... Board movable body 63... Production button (operation means)
64...Sword member (operating means)
65...Sword button (operation means)
68...Select button (operation means)
81...Microcomputer for game control 91...Microcomputer for performance control 101...Microcomputer for image control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of pending icons and decorative patterns,
Either the first display or the second display can be displayed in each display area where each hold icon is displayed,
In the display area where the first display is displayed, the hold icon can be displayed on a first image having a specific shape ,
In the display area where the second display is displayed, a second image that is different from the decorative pattern, has the same shape as the first image, and has a different display content from the first image is displayed. image will be displayed and the hold icon will no longer be visible.
While the special figure is changing, the pending icon is not pre-read and rendered in each of the plurality of display areas where the first display is displayed while the second image is not displayed on the display means. After being displayed in a normal manner, the display of one of the plurality of display areas is switched from the first display to the second display, the second image is displayed, and the pending image is displayed. a first effect in which the icon becomes invisible and the first display continues to be displayed in another display area of the plurality of display areas;
After the first effect, the display of the display area that has been switched to the second display is switched from the second display to the first display, and the display of the second image disappears, and the display of the second image disappears. A gaming machine capable of performing the following: a second effect in which a pending icon is displayed again in a special manner in which the pending icon is pre-read and effected.

Images